Home

2010 Chrysler Town & Country Owner`s Manual

1. 0 403 W Vehicle Loading 22 oae Re 384 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never leave unattended children alone in a ve hicle Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Automatic Transaxle The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Press the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear Normal Starting 1 Do not press the accelerator 2 Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running 3 If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Steps 1 3 above
2. wheel diagonally opposite the jacking e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic t F JE 8 Sy ITT T PA TEET m i li af Um me ii position For example if changing the transmission in PARK a manual transmission in right front tire block the left rear REVERSE A wheel Continued eee ee ir E WARNING Continued Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411 A 7 dT Jack Warning Label 1 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 To remove the compact spare tire cover assembly assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut refer to 2 configuration in tool graphics Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow you
3. 149 O Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever O Easy Entry Exit Seat Available With I EqUIDDOH s seh EE HOLD RR EE 124 Memory Seat Only 24 4954 ELS ER SS DR 151 O Eight Way Power Seats If Equipped 125 M To Open And Close The Hood 152 D Heated Seats If Equipped POE VET OFT 154 O Adjusting Head Restraints 128 Nine OM DIO ELE ca d aa gene chaos ony a aot 155 O Stow n Go Seating If Equipped 131 Eike DS DES ia ee dae ogee ED HE 156 Easy Access Deal ahaccsaeeeneaens aac 134 ar el PP EE EE ae aaa 4 156 D Swivel n Go Premium Seating H Automatic Headlights If Equipped 167 Caeo e e iese duy de aa we x bs 135 o Headlights On With Wipers If Equipped 158 O Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped 143 3 Headlight Delay If Equipped 158 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 o Daytime Running Lights Canada Fleet W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 168 Vehicles Only see ee EE EE EE eee 159 TG ei RICETTE T DET EPIIT ON OE AO at 169 O Front Fog Lights If Equipped 1 nTo Set At A Desired Speed sss 170 D Battery Protection 24 44 65 3 vopsces a a E ecc s 159 3 Deactivating Electronic Speed Control O Multifunction Lever sss 160 O Resuming Speed sss sess ma ii 65 6 a4 oe SERI RR ES 160 O Varying The Speed Setting 170 O High Low Beam Switch
4. 394 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain 2Engine GCWR Gross Com Frontal A Max GTW Max Tongue Transaxle bined Wt Rating ee Gross Trailer Wt Wt Up to 2 persons amp Lug 7 000 Ibs 3 175 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m gage 1 800 lbs 816 kg 180 Ibs 82 kg 3 3L 3 8L and 3 to 5 persons amp Luggage 4 0L Automatic 7 000 lbs 3 175 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 1 350 Ibs 612 kg 135 Ibs 61 kg 6 to 7 amp L 7 000 lbs 3 175 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m K 600 Ibs A54 pr 100 Ibs 45 kg Up to 2 persons amp Lug 9 000 Ibs 4 082 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m Pi 3 800 Ibs 1 723 Kk 380 lbs 172 kg 3 8L and 4 0L 3 to 5 persons amp Lugea Automatic with 9 000 Ibs 4 082 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 3 Ibs 1 519 key 5 335 Ibs 152 kg Tow Package 9 000 Ibs 4 082 kg 40 sq ft 3 72sqm 9 000 Ios 1 360 ko 300 Ibs 136 kg For vehicles equipped with Fold in Floor seating the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety In formation in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING
5. 81bc85ee Dimmer Control With the parking lights or headlights on rotating the dimmer control for the interior lights on the instrument panel upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights 81bc85f0 Halo Lights If Equipped Halo lights are strategically placed soft lighting that help to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in locating specific features while driving at night To activate the Halo lights push in the Halo switch control knob Pressing the switch con trol knob in a second time will turn the Halo lights off pn Parking Lights D Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent to turn the parking lights on This also turns on all instrument panel lighting Headlights Turn the headlight switch knob to the second ZO detent to turn the headlights and parking lights on This also turns on all instrument panel lighting NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the dimmer control up or down Automatic Headlights If Eduipped This system automatically turns your headlights on or off based on ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise position aligning the indicator with the A on the headlight switch When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90 s
6. 161 O Accelerating To Pass 00000 00s 171 OFlash To Pass 0 0 000 ee eee 161 ll Parksense Rear Park Assist If Equipped 172 O Smartbeam If Equipped 161 WIS Sanco re NR 172 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 162 D Parksense Warning Display 173 O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 164 D Parksense Display eee 174 B Tilt Steering Column 166 3 Enabling Disabling Parksense 178 N Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 167 O Service Parksense8 178 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id OC leaning DOrKRSOHSeP siek ERROR 178 B Troubleshooting Tips 4 5s acte RE KALE 193 O Parksense System Usage Precautions 179 HGeneral Information je uo 649 dome 6 193 ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If N Power Sunroof If Equipped 199 x RE e O Power Sunroof Operation 194 ron inire a ae OM mE 183 N Electrical Power Outlets If Equipped 196 6 Turning Parkview On Or Off Without W Power Inverter If Equipped 199 Navigation Multimedia Radio io XE ees PPP 200 W Overhead Consoles 0 0 184 O Instrument Panel Cupholders 201 O Front Overhead Console 184 O Interior Bottle Holders iss x utres 201 lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 187 O Smoker s Package Kit If Equipped
7. 70 73 76 Alm Bb ENE EI ae ee aceon ed ae oes 233 Alarm Security Alain uae d got ririri 16 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio LL 289 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 450 451 481 Depo al Gece seaserogeeredeegrany sea 453 Anti Lock Waming Light 206 lt 4 840 s4400e86 299 il UAC SUSIOHT su ene 2 Ee VR P al oe 2 16 Appearance Cale uude a xd a9 EERS acr DER Rod d 460 El M Tm 202 Auto Down Power Windows 40 Auto Up Power Windows 40464364205 ms 40 196 Automatic Dimming MIPTOU aua exc Rara Ra 109 Automatic Door Locks sss 33 34 Automate lende osse EDR geo an eh es So 157 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 306 N INDEX 515 Automatic Transaxle 0000 eee 324 Adding GNU os oes or Ge AA Ree pe ees 459 Fluid Level Check issu RES s 459 Interlock Syste seess eked cheesey ba n 925 Selection Of Lubricant 457 483 LERE a4 pao eet P 326 Deed ZOOCDHEIVES 24 goce dds SR OR eens 459 Automatic Transmission 457 459 ROC TMG ss rep vay qe S og a dede 458 459 Plaid and Filter Changes aeeai eiere ti mess 459 LE o TELETELE oa p Hoe T one See 459 Fluid Level Check less 458 FUG die PER 457 483 ru 443 Gas AON 44 4 oe eee beak oe ee Gee ee 443 Jutp SLATENG sas es OER u bo ob ee Be es 421 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Saving Featur
8. L Er 200 Country OWNER S MANUAL dy m O IDEES e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION ipv Ee 9 aves ee ees ee SS esa es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 26 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B Introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION N Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safet
9. 202 O Programming HomeLink 169 oo ARE EO es ee has 203 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 192 ELGlove COMPpartnlelits isme pie ae Ee ER 203 E o IE iese SEERDE RAS Bee OHS 192 EI Door Trim Panel Storage 25 oo 4 eee as 204 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 O Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped 203 W Console Features is is nete RRRERS 210 rela Holder si mon 9s 9 eae eee dii 205 Ease ton Ole amp nna foo oy pea ee eee es 210 B Second Row Floor Storage Bins 206 O Premium Console If Equipped ZI O Storage Bin Safety Warning 207 W Rear Window Features H Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage o Rear Window Defroster NA ILLE 08 n Load Leveling System 216 si dale AE ON TEE vaN 209 i Roo EE NN 217 EC argo ded IS 23 oie AR HOPE 2 3 210 W Sun Screens If Equipped 219 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Manual Rearview Mirror 030407085 NN UNDERSTANDING T
10. 363 Mi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 364 EL Base OVSICM voe ue HERE GRRE ROH SS des 367 D Premium System If Equipped 369 Bl Fuel Requirements 04 373 ELS 9L And 3 8L Engi uera HEAD nae 979 ld OER NG suis eae EER Anode red d ds 374 O Reformulated Gasoline ausser deem 374 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 9 5 O E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 375 AMMI bit sole seres 99 9198 oe ectie di 376 O Materials Added To Fuel 376 O Fuel System Cautions 0 olf oO Carbon Monoxide Warnings 378 N Flexible Fuel 3 3L Engines Only If POQUIDDEC sis vo SHOES ED oes ee ease O E85 General Information D Ethanol Fuel E85 LL 380 O Fuel Requirements 122 49 RE os 380 O Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E85 And Gasoline Vehicles 381 Bch a AR OR DIT AE OT TT 381 El tisie BORDE cacao OR HEY mec e qe ot 381 320 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id EL Replacement Parts essa a ETRAS 382 O Vehicle Certification Label 384 AMANNAN e 6400 9 taraset iy KUR DERE HI 382 Ma pater Towing doceo chase cap eae teense ct 389 IN Adding Fuel sus au cea EE ie DODE HARE 382 H Common Towing Definitions 389 O Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 382 by oi IPS 249 6 4 ao ag KRALE DR Een ER RA 401 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 384 W Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc
11. 486 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles CHAngE OIL will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is neces sary On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be di
12. If the fluid level indicates that it is low add sufficient fluid to bring it to the proper level CAUTION Do not overfill Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated properly Fluid Level Check 3 8L and 4 0L Engines with Six Speed Automatic Transaxle If Equipped The six speed automatic transaxle is a sealed unit and has no dipstick See your authorized dealer to have the transaxle fluid checked or serviced Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transaxle sealers as they may adversely affect seals 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transaxle as the chemicals can damage your transaxle components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
13. if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you
14. 236 407 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 91 MU Steele COMIN 26 wen GR ae es ER POS 166 Tire and Loading Information Placard 350 Tire Identification Number TIN 348 TUO Markings 2c ae ss RARR E Ps pre AUS Be d 344 dire Satety Information es 3e RARR ee es 344 lh ROETE RT OO OE OE ean os 101 354 510 Aging Lile Or Nes cues e RE SAO ROER a oe 360 Ud i si ES RUSIE LE Gee dadine 354 CHO oy ee se bu GARE REE OE RE EE N 361 CRAN OD ioon oe ot eee RAD eee ee Hy 408 Compact opale o2 i3 9 gode Hoh eee gab e ORO 357 Fat Changing docs penip BREED Re d 418 General Information llle 354 Lieb Speed sie ae ER EER AR e ES X P 356 Inflation Pressures 0 000 SS se J55 4d amp yea RENEE VR UR EL PAS eS 408 410 530 INDEX NEE Id Lied Ties 4454660 RE ER EE AAR RE EO 360 lood Capacity ase ac doa Ge ewes oo RY 350 351 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 364 Pressure Warning Light xen rto iei 228 Quality Grae uoce ons MEEN HOE ARE a eoa 510 Radial sis sa eo see MR don a d OR di OR RR 357 Keel eie pus Sacs AIS SAND cane es nen 360 rie AA SERE 64 EES EE OE ENE EET 363 DAY Gesaeger eas degw ete unease EDE 344 354 v 2 eneeer aoa eae tees eee ET HOE N 346 DROW JUGS x oa greener SEa Re P Spa DE DES 363 DDOIO dIE iS RE ea ee oe E 409 DERDE ae rera esana 358 Tread Wear Indicators 240 2 s ER 6554 os 359 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 395 uon A TIT 389 Disab
15. Remote Key Unlock on First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s side or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter e For vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Remote Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled by perform ing the following steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button t
16. vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH An aftermarket belt positioning booster seat is for chil dren weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belts If the child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug WARNING as possible e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex child closer to the center of the vehicle If this doesn t actly when installing an infa
17. 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EGUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will Remote Start e Shift lever in PARK THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Doors closed Hood closed Liftgate closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twic
18. Fast Tone MEES arataa E E a a a LT LIII ITIN LIT a wm LI E E a L EA SEE 032809221 Slow Tone 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle L L i TT a LITT a a LJ LJ m LI BETES FERE Continuous Tone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES po Nee Noe 39 3 in 100 cm 15 7 in 40 cm 15 7 in 40 cm NOTE ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Enabling Disabling ParkSense You can turn ParkSense ON or OFF through the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information As soon as the system is disabled the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DISABLED message refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled the EVIC will display the PARK
19. M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L Rotate tires L Replace the engine air cleaner filter Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer t This maintenance is recommended by the manufac turer but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your hi chee oho hes POL KAS Sareea ee 505 O Prepare For The Appointment 505 a repare A List uasa 9e SIE EED E dra 905 O Be Reasonable With Requests 505 N If You Need
20. O Power Liftgate If Equipped W Occupant Restraints 0004 El Lap Shoulder Delts o acie ve REDES ee ns o Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped D Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR If Equipped O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 66 Heat Delt Eleiidelf sie sop 64 HE oom HE HE 66 D Supplemental Restraint System SRS tie MEE TEER TERE ae As a EM e 66 D Airbag System Components 67 O Advanced Front Airbag Features 68 H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 73 D Event Data Recorder EDR 80 O Integrated Child Booster Seat If Equipped 82 O Integrated Child Seat If Equipped D Child Restraints NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ll Rear Seat Delete Feature Commercial Vehicles Only If Equipped O Restraining Infants And Small Children With Seat Delete Feature Commercial Vehicles Only ll Engine Break In Recommendations ll Safety Tips D Transporting Passengers o Exhaust Gas O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle D Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE
21. Recirculation Control Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in RECIRCULATION mode Only use the RECIR CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in MIX DEFROST or FLOOR mode the RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times to indicate RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed e Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e In cold or damp weather the use of the RECIRCULA TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the outside air position e In order to prevent fogging when the RECIRCULA TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to PANEL the A C will engage automatically e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Air Conditioning Operation Push on this button to engage the Air Condit
22. Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV Joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV Joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper lo
23. Upper Compartment 3 Lower Latch Lock 2 Upper Latch 4 Lower Compartment Lower Glove Compartment To open the lower compartment pull out on the release handle 3 The lower compartment handle is also equipped with a lock 3 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Trim Panel Storage WARNING Front Door Storage Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for storage If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury 81bd58c4 Front Door Storage Features 1 Storage Pocket 3 Bottle Holder 2 Map Pocket 4 Map Pocket UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped Umbrella Holder The drivers seatback has a primary storage pocket on all An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into models and an optional secondary mesh pocket the left front door entry scuff molding Y 037005896 j 035207035 Driver s Seatback Storage Umbrella Holder 1 Bag Holder 2 Standard Pocket 3 Mesh Pocket 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Second Row Floor Storage Bins CAUTION The area below the floor covers located in front of the second row seats is available for storage The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to avoid damage from contact with the front seat
24. aug 3 hey ou lt s 477 Bl oras Lanp 24440 on tends IE BESEER bee es 478 O Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker And Back p Lamp sie Ee qoe eae ara n 478 O Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Doll e E iese soos ters SEI EOERUEN UFU S eS E 480 Scene Lamp EERBARE DERE Re EROR 480 W Fluid Capacities 04 481 N Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 482 MERGING TP 482 sie MAREE ON HOSEA ER ea Ges 483 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 3 3 8L n a Tc a es 070803813 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Engine Oil Fill 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 3L Only 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Battery 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Totally Integrated Power Module 11 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Engine Coolant Reservoir 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 0L 1 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 2 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Battery 5 Totally Integrated Power Module 6 Engine Coolant Reservoir E 071207164 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Engine Oil Fill 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissio
25. e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 334 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increase
26. ee Swivel Release Seatbacks fold forward on an angle not flat This allows the seats to swivel when the seatbacks are folded 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Removing Swivel n Go Premium Seating If Equipped 1 Remove any obstructions from the floor behind the seat and stow the third row seat 2 Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom front edge of the swivel seat Release Bar 3 From behind the seat lift up on the rear of the seat cushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction 4 Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate Rollers are part of the seat frame and will ease the removal process N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 5 Lower the release handle located at the bottom front Swivel n Go Premium Seating Table If edge of the seat Equipped kr zu Each seat weighs about 90 Ibs 41 kg The Swivel n Go Seating Table consists of an easily assembled post and top NOTE Electrical contacts for the available heated seats lm WE automatically disengage or engage as the seat is removed or installed The contacts slide past each other as the seat is rolled to and from the strikers Jr mm When reinstalling the seat make certain to lower the release handle to ensure the seat is latched securely WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments A
27. 24 16 8 Sampling Frequency KHz 48 44 1 32 24 22 05 16 dio Layer 3 MPEG 2 Au dio Layer 3 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to
28. 3 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position the light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing 4 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
29. 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES
30. All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or a equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Surfaces The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other
31. Hands Free Phone Uconnect 121 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Plane Waler I 332 Hazard Warming Flasher ii rsrs PERE RR DPI 406 Head Mes all os s EpL EE PSOE ERES ARES 128 Is recto lisi ass eaes LERE pnd bes SPORE ES 156 8 er PALET AO ET EE EI ES 464 lights On Reminder oia 2004304 EP 540 44 159 lc A wee aes eee ta ee OR SA ETET 161 Tine Delay C 158 Wass 23 ga oa yak S eee SURE bee Gu 158 Heated Mirrors 222a exa REEN SEE Fe he es 111 Healed Deals ss ae ee DERS td EA HOER EE 126 aoc serseri ERA ELE SEA IESER AE 297 Heater Enone BIOGk 646 vv vs vd oy drdi ER 323 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 161 Hitches Tailer TOWNE Sate persiar eiere RR 345 393 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 187 Hood Release llle 152 Hook Coat uda doe wee ER RO RE OH dos 04 209 ISDIHOD wu suasit Ries 430 ee OE N EF 13 ARE AE EE N EER HET ETA 12 13 lenition Key Removal uas se rise EROR need 13 522 Dinuudted BI vu sen Eie RSR ADA EIER 18 Immobilizer Sentry Key oie soe deg e REEN 14 Infant Restraint 25a sex due AD ES RUP Ruso 85 87 Information Center Vehicle anaa 245 Inside Rearview Mirror ens 108 Instrument Cluster 0000000088 227 Instrument Panel and Controls 225 Instrument Panel Cover 00 4 463 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 464 Integrated Power Module Fuses 466 Interior Appearance
32. If Equipped Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground rearward of the front doors The driver s outside mirror will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE The driver s outside mirror will then return to the original position 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position NOTE The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not en abled when delivered from the factory The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights x 030405283 Illuminated Mirror BLIND SPOT MONITORING IF EQUIPPED The Blind Spot Monitoring BSM system uses two radar based sensors located inside the rear bumper fascia to detect Highway licensable vehicles automobiles trucks motorcycles etc that ent
33. NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped shift the transmission shift lever into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat WARNING from the engine cooling system You or others can be badly burned by hot engine cautions coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If CAUTION you see or hear steam coming from under the hood Pe auth a hol coolite system could damage do not open the hood until the radiator has had time your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
34. Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued WARNING Continued e The Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Anti Lock Brake Warning Light The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni ies tors the anti lock brake system The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system shoul
35. Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed Io move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock
36. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter DO NOT crank the engine for more than 15 second intervals at one time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key fob is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the electrical cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on B the driver s side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the electrical cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 324 STARTING AND OPERATING
37. is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Changing the Time Zone 1 Tum on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in th
38. system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is reguired refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if provided A should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the
39. unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the RESET button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Automatic High Beams If Equipped When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Refer to SmartBeam in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears When OFF is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio al
40. 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B ov PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Ma
41. 322 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transaxle shift WARNING Continued interlocking system The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once procedure the engine has started ignite and damage the To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of converter and vehicle an externally powered electric engine block heater avail If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster able from your authorized dealer is recommended cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type If The Engine Fails To Start of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer WARNING to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle
42. 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 FUSES TIPM Cartridge Mini Fuse Fuse 40 Amp Rear Window De Green fogger 30 Amp Rear Blower Pink 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Green 20 Amp Powertrain Control Blue Module PCM Trans Range 60 Amp Yel Radiator Fan low 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Pink 20 Amp Front Rear Washer Blue Description Cavity 22 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 FUSES TIPM Cartridge Mini Fuse Fuse 25 Amp Natural 15 Amp Blue Description Sunroof Module Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Brake Switch 20 Amp Spare Fuse Yellow 10 Amp Trailer Tow Red 25 Amp Inverter Natural 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Yellow ACC Rain Sensor MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 oo FUSESTIM 0 0 ge os M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Ignition Off Draw Yellow BATT ACC SE Vehicle Enter LECT tainment System M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat IOD VES Satellite Yellow If Equipped Digital Audio Re M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat D E ee Yellow If Equipped pee eae Module HFM Universal Garage Door Opener UGDO Vanity Lamp VANITY LP Streaming Video Module 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw Red IOD HVAC ATC 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES TIPM FUSES TIPM Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini m Em Amplifier AMP M15 20 Amp Rear View Mirror Green Radio Yellow RR VW MIR 20 Amp Ignition Off Cabin Compart Yellow Draw Cabin
43. AND OPERATING 395 Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo luggage or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 396 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Op erating for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION
44. Amp Occupant Classifi Red cation Module OCM MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 FUSES TIPM FUSES TIPM Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module M34 10 Amp Park Assist PRK Blue RR WIPER MOD Red ASST e Ven Power Folding Mir tilation Air Condi ror PWR FOLD tioning Module MIR J1962 Diag HVAC MOD nostic Feed Headlamp Wash 20 Amp Back Up Lamps HDLP WASH Yellow B U LAMPS Compass COM M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint e ea Red Controller ORC per eu TT EUROPE Door FT Drv Pass Lamp Flashlight M33 10 Amp Next Generation AHLM Relay Die Red Controller NGC sel Cabin Heater Global Powertrain Rad Fan Diesel l Engine Controller l Gorm MS RE 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES TIPM Cartridge Mini e 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 Yellow BATT 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Red System ABS Elec tronic Stability Pro gram ESP Stop Lamp Switch STP LP SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control 25 Amp Door Lock Unlock Natural Motors LOCK UNLOCK MTRS Liftgate Lock Unlock Motors The heated mirrors lower instrument panel power outlet and removable floor console when in the front position are fused with self resetting fuses that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer The power seats are fused by a 30 Amp circuit breaker located under the driver s seat The power windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker located under the instrument panel near the s
45. B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 350 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location DEERE i If uy ae EN HE Uu TEE ERA EET if Fart 2 8 PEE PERDE eee t RES Ee PARES ey oh or TE IW HERE EU E ERA S Ew Fk NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONI 2 REAR 3 1 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an
46. Care as va see see PERE ks 463 Intenor LODS a scu deas v 34 802 BERE seen 155 156 Introduction iua sua hera OE ER ON 4 Jack Location ii is eer ER RR BERE RR 408 Jack Operation aos 4 502 oe HEESE RE RES HAAR 408 Jump DEN oe ANALE ERAS HE KA OR HR TR 421 Key Eier ING soeke ER hee see AE nas 16 INDEX NN Key keplieenienk in RESS d 3 KORES hen SCR 15 Key centy Immobilizer 44644 250 HER BAR Hees 14 Keveli Reminder sin tese xa oe ees 14 Keyless Entry System 426422446 ek sd ab ed oes 19 ISTE ETE EE EE EE eee te 12 IShee Doller sae st OO OR HARE KA ra EEEE 68 Lane Change Assist 6642444 shee ede DRR S ES 161 Las Hoidd Deli su oa d s hy 9 uo d ae wars 53 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for Sel PROE nae Go N EE ST EK 91 IE id cas Geer EE eke eee sent Sennen 101 Hood sms ss sep DE oo ea ko sea eae ee ees 152 Lead Free Gasoline iubeas VERRE DEE EE EE 9 9 Leaks Fluid eee 101 Eaa NEMINEM 360 Eis ERROR N OT EO O IE 48 Bich Pulls OES EE OE VOE OE ETRAS 101 FIGS ene ee RES LO eee LOOKS Mee 101 154 DIIDIS sis oe 54 ELKE SEE 67 74 79 100 235 icu ooo ae BROER eee BEE Go ee ees 299 POMOC 225c4 994 ETER TE Wes 233 Automatic Headlights xe es ibo 157 Back D are pees boa d pu ad e DE 478 Dattery vel aea sop ek ados qal quib Saee dp PR 159 Brake Assist Warning sasie Facaup Peg EE DRS 343 Drake Warning s same ete dri d i sob CRUS heed 231 bulb Ke GENIE oosieis eee Ene as 475 476 Center Mounted Stop 1 404444 ore ns Ee 480 Dis
47. EVIC perform the following steps 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the Key Fob into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition Key Fob from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of five times ending in the ON position do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the LOCK direction 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard the program mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If neces sary repeat the previous procedure The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h feature can be reactivated by repeating the above men tioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the EVIC if equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit If Equipped The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened This will occur only after the shift lever has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven the shift lever has been shifted out of PARK and all doors closed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit f
48. GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR 386 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total
49. Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mount
50. MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at O
51. Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next freguency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND b
52. NEE id AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE WARNING CAUTION It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal precautions are not observed e Move the shift lever into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Do not move the shift lever from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before moving the shift lever into any gear make Key Ignition Park Interlock sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal down prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position The while shifting out of PARK key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once re moved the shift lever is locked in PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Brake Transaxle Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the
53. Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 10 mph 16 km h and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1 5 seconds the warning light will be illuminated If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph 16 km h the warning light will not illuminate Overtaking Passing Overtaking Approaching 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are stationary objects such as guardrails posts walls foliage traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in berms etc However occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes on such objects This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service Opposing Traffic N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians bicy clists or animals Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system always check your vehicles mirrors glance over your shoulder and use your turn signal before changing lanes Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Rear Cross Path The Rear Cross Path RCP feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming veh
54. Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication
55. Release the bar to lock the seat into position Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjuster 030905616 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 WARNING 25 N Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner control lever is on the outboard side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly lift the lever then push back to the desired position and release the lever 030905110 Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to Manual Reclining Seat Control its normal position Using body pressure lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING DO NOT ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever If Equipped The lumbar adjustment lever is located on the outboard side of the seat To increase the support rotate the lever downward To decrease the support
56. SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary T
57. Solution or equivalent used with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but
58. TPM SYSTEM text message 372 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id will not be present and a pressure value will be dis played instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio freguencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a TPMS Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will remain on a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound th
59. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 3 Press the STEP button until Compass Variance mes sage and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the STEP button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the compass button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message PERSONAL SETTING NOT AVAILABLE followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the Step button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the RESET button while in this display to select English Spanish Espa ol French Fran ais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Nederlands Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Auto Door Locks When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Auto UNLK On Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlo
60. Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 Washing CAUTION e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch completely with clear water metal and painted surfaces e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your
61. a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again ds AE Ewald and Ou UE CIUS wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button ag
62. a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero 26 Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC Display If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini Trip Com puter CMTC the display provides the outside tempera ture one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio station For further information refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster For further information refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information EVIC NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 27 Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC Display Button Press the left reset button to scroll through sub menus ie Outside Temperature Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units Press and hold the reset button for approximately two seconds to reset the display shown 28 Fuel Door Reminder The arrow in this symbol i
63. acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the over a battery when attaching clamps If acid vehicle splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Do not allow cable Maintenance Free Battery clamps to touch each other The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently Battery posts terminals and related accessories sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands maintenance required after handling e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idling or malfunctioning operating conditions 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the
64. ae t Siel dcos dossc d q 8 ARE HERE d 99 441 Express Down Windows sss 22 Extender Seat Belt ies oz ERE REG 66 Externo Folding MITOrS 4 24224 ve ke be rriari 110 EXIGUOE Lie usce asp renere EER ERK BRAK RR d 101 Fabric Care MESTRE QE TETUER STSTCCOSTRTTTTT 463 Piller Location Fuel 222329 REY 241 Filters Air ei RA AA NE N 440 Air OGE 6c furan es 6 be a irits 316 446 Eie DIE x83 2 6 993 9 2 99 93 978 603 ees 440 482 Et se OUI Disposal uscueg die cose eas ot r 440 Flashers Hazard AERIS oc Shee oa er ed ve caneg eae s 406 iseer 625 ee SEE OE c ien 101 230 Elasl To Paaer iu a ou PRE eomm EG m dw DES eand 161 Flat Dei ese eek RR tee ee eke dd 418 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruinne ETE N 9E OR QE ES 381 Pao Cd oed nega ARE RAS oe N Ere 381 Fuel Requirements s e vb sky Res xcs 378 380 Maintenance ses HEDE ok ee eee EER 4g 382 Replacement Farts door 9 27 DRESS ER ii 382 DION sones Gere sha M T 381 520 INDEX NEE Id Hooded Engine Starting sss ey RE RR ES 322 Floor Console 23e dE EES ER HURK OES 210 EI CapaCiies many 299 9 dee SU HER DRA ra 481 Plaid Leaks 132522 Ee rh omoi 101 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 522 Rs 459 Automatic Transmission 458 Drake 2652665 6b RoE ERED Tid adr 455 POWer beers sae ar ed GEE ee Pp E es 335 li OR AR AR EO ikir EE RE N ON 482 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 482 Foe Dict ee 444442715 cecaes eee use 478 FOS TACOS oc awante ee
65. affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted and the tires inspected for signs of wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve ste
66. any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force using a seat belt properly outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed 100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify
67. at 60 months M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 114 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Rotate tires Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV Joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Replace accessory drive belt s Change the automatic transaxle fluid amp filter O C O ee L L L L M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E m D d U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MA IN TENANCE SCHEDULES 499 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Re
68. battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system performance check Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty E MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling WARNING R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental approved by the manufacturer for your air condi Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning flammable and can explode injuring you Other service be performed by an authorized dealer or other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause authorized service facility using recovery and recycling the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to equipment Warranty Information Book located on th
69. being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling and off while re buckling the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled or retracted 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That
70. camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be A driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to 5 Press the save soft key stop in time when di obstacle is seen It is recom 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of mended that the driver look frequently over his the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to her shoulder when using ParkView check entire surroundings displayed across the top of l l the screen After five seconds this note will disappear NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen l l appears again Turning ParkView On or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio Turning ParkView On or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note
71. capacity of your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 lbs yc Occupant 3 160 Ibs See EA 100 Ibs ENS 80 Ibs 865 Ibs is 1 De eee n EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 353 354 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are
72. chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer Display reset button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps 25 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN U S Federal regulations reguire that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and
73. could be injured if caught in the path of the sliding door Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 seconds when either sliding door is opened This will alert other drivers in the area that passenger s could be entering or exiting the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch ON LOCK five times ending in the ON position do not start the engine 3 Within 10 seconds of the final cycle press the HAZ ARD switch 4 A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming You can turn the feature back on by repeating the previous procedure Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the second row sliding door switches and handles may be overridden by pressing the ON side of the Master Lock Out Switch located in the front overhead console When the power sliding door master lock switch is in the ON position the power sliding side door may not be opened or closed by pressing the switch located on the trim panel just in front of the sliding door or activating the inside power sliding door handle Overhead C
74. door switches will operate 022007170 Power Sliding Door 1 Heated Seat 4 Door Handle 2 Power Window 5 Power Sliding Door 3 Manual Lock If the inside or outside door handles are used while the power sliding side door is activated the power sliding door feature will be canceled 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats press the power sliding door master lock button located in the overhead console to disable the switches and handles for the rear seat passen gers NOTE The power sliding side door switches will not open if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h To close the power sliding door with the shift lever in gear and vehicle speed at 0 mph 0 km h the brake must be pressed If anything obstructs the power sliding side door while it is closing or opening the door will automati cally reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or close position it will fully open when a power sliding door switch is pressed To close the door wait until it is fully open and then press the switch again e If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc tions within the same cycle the system will automati cally stop and must be opened or closed manually WARNING You or others
75. e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to an injury accident e Safety chains must always be used between your Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transaxle steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the tra
76. experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation 382 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance If you operate the vehicle using E85 fuel follow the maintenance schedule section of this manual CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle NOTE The driver s side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the MIL to turn on e Damage to the fuel system or emissions contr
77. for you For details refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument panel below the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 031303831 81bc4a2d Hood Release Safety Catch Location 2 Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open center of the hood opening Locate then push the safety position catch lever to the right while raising the hood at the same time 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS CAUTION All of the lights except the Hazard Warning lights To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to headlight high beams and flash to pass are controlled by close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi switches to the left of the steering column on the instru mately 12 in 30 cm and then drop it This should ment panel secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious in
78. from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or chi
79. garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed to Step 5 Pro gramming A Rolling Code System 5 Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the trainin
80. ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn to ON will flash in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob Once inserted the message Turn to ON will flash in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON Cancel Remote Start Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm e Any engine warning lights come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed e The shift lever is moved out of PARK e The engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns while in the Remote Start Mode the system will not allow the Remote Start button to shutdown the engine for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request When to Reset Remote Start The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of two times The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one failed start where the Remote Starting sequence was initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start ing After either of these condition
81. is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position 336 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking b
82. lbs 9 to 18 kg and more than one year old e A convertible child seat one that is designed to be used for children who are too heavy for a rearward facing infant seat may be used IN THE FORWARD FACING POSITION ONLY IT MUST NEVER BE INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEA TURE Commercial Vehicles Only When a convert ible seat is properly installed facing forward the vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 e Children more than 40 lbs 18 kg should be secured in the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the rear most position Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat with the seat adjusted to the rearmost position Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm Tether Installation for Commercial Vehicles with Rear Seat Delete To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the vehicle follow the instructions shown 1 Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat 2 Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the extended tether strap 3 Route the tether strap under the head rest NOTE Ensure that the child restraint teth
83. ment Node CCN Compartment Node Multi Function IOD CCN SIREN Control Switch Clock Module MULTIFTCN SW CLK MOD Multi Tire Pressure Moni Function Control tor TPM Glow Switch MULTI Plug Module GLW FCTN SW ITM des ie ai port Diesel Only Effect Acoustic Noise Cancellation ANC MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 FUSES TIPM FUSES TIPM Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini Occupant Restraint 15 Amp Cabin Compart Controller Blue ment Node Interior Occupant Classifi Light CCN INT cation Module LIGHT Switch ORC OCM Bank SW BANK Left Tail License Steering Control Park Lamp LI Module SCM TAIL LIC PRK Switch Steering LMP Running Wheel Lamps 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Right Tail Park Yellow ASD 3 Run Lamp RI ld 10 Amp Right Horn RT TAIL PRK RUN Red HORN HI LOW LMP M23 10 Amp Left Horn LT 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Red HORN HI LOW Natural ASD 1 and 2 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FUSES TIPM FUSES TIPM Cartridge Mini a Cartridge Mini T aal N 73 Rear Wiper REAR M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Natural WIPER Red IGN SW Wireless M25 20 Amp _ Fuel Pump FUEL Ignition Node Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift Module WIN Pump DSL LIFT MOD PEM Steer PUMP Export Column Lock Onl M28 10 Amp Next Generation M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Red Controller NGC Red Switch PWR MIRR PCM Transmission SW Driver Win Feed TRANS dow Switch DRVR FEED TCM WIND SW 10
84. mode of operation ESP OFF NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP BAS Warning Light The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is combined with BAS The ESP BAS Warning Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster come on for four sec onds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position then goes out If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles ESP BAS 344 STARTING AND OPERATING kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turne
85. more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transaxle power steering or air condition ing Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut OFF or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This sym
86. not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EM Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill CAUTION its If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a ELON considerable amount of sediment clean and flush witha e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro tection If anon HOAT engine coolant antifreeze Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information aa i f is introduced into the cooling system in an emer Selection of Coolant gency it should be replaced with the specified Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible ant antifreeze Refer Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa coolant antifreeze products
87. old Capacity esac DA 481 Coolant Level ii dee EERS 9 REX Y 449 453 Disposal of Used Coolant 453 Drain Flush and Refill ss 6 0462 RES SERE EN 450 INSPCCHOM 1339232993 9 9 9 R nnee er 453 Points to Remember 0000 453 Presse Cap sae RNEER E HE bes 41 d odes 452 Radiator Cay 2392 hoe oes 19 EE N EE ES 452 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 450 481 482 Cruise Control Speed Control zs dee MEE 168 Eupholders see we oe ARME HE SOS ee RA 200 465 Customer Assistance ess 505 Daytime Running Lights sac dede sed Rue e HS 159 Dealer Service SE SS SE 436 Defroster Rear Window 215 Defroster Windshield 101 300 310 Diagnostic System Onboard ss 2 ver sabe og 433 Dimmer Control c4 05 46 24446 0G ecu edo 156 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle 44 see HERLEES FREE 459 Automatic Transmission 458 CULTEBOSU B amp 6 uode 4 9 cea pane en ES ERROR 437 Power SICCIING oos E E ORDES RS E PESE 335 Disabled Venicle TOWING sree perier ER e585 i 426 518 INDEX NEE o EN Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Domelight Door Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water DVD Player Video Entertainment System E 85 Fuel Electric Remote Mirrors Electrical Power Outlets Electronic Brake Control System Brake Assist System Electronic S
88. operating to specification Enable Disable the Rear Park Assist System The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h The system can be enabled with Sound Only Sound and Display or turned OFF through the EVIC to make your selection press and release the RESET button Refer to Rear Park Assist System in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle for system function and operating information Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears Door Alert When this feature is selected the signal lamps activate when power or manual sliding doors are in operation signaling other drivers that someone may be exiting or entering the vehicle NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp Lock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
89. products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight and less suscep
90. programmed to a vehicle it cannot be reprogrammed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is reguired for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fobs to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation When the alarm is activated the Vehic
91. remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate buttons e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions P within the same cycle the system will automatically stop and must be opened or closed manually WARNING e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint if equipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC that span the front second and third row seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
92. rotate the handle upward Manual Lumbar Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 A Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Eight Way Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seats The front switch controls the up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The rear switch controls the recline adjustment of the seatback Driver Power Seat Switch 1 Front Switch 2 Rear Switch 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats The controls for front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High L
93. spare tire location Have the full sized tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 14 Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the vehicle Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism clicks at least three times 15 Stow the jack jack handle and winch handle tools 16 Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419 of operation and after each time a tire is changed to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs 130 N m Secure The Spare Tire 1 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning freely This will allow enough slack in the cable to
94. system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Before you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting on high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy and or humid weather To clear the windows select DEFROST or MIX mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and 6 f TIME Set the mode control to vehicle interior is very On And blower on hig
95. the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL cont
96. the feature may be in acci dent 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tio
97. the lamps This dimin ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Quad Headlamps 1 Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at the rear of the headlamp housing 2 Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and remove the connector from the bulb N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 3 Twist the headlamp bulb and pull the bulb from the 3 Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the headlamp housing socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp 4 Install the new headlamp bulb and twist until locked housing into the headlamp housing Front Side Marker Lamp CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 1 Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp housing NOTE Access is somewhat limited You may have to remove the inner fender well or remove the headlamp housing for bulb replacement contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 2 Twist the socket and remove from the headlamp 5 Reconnect the wiring connector to the bulb housing then pull the bulb out Front Park Turn Signal Lamp 3 Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the socket by twisting until locked into the headlamp 1 Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlamp housing neue 2 Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the headlamp housing then pull the bu
98. the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a powered liftgate pressing the LIFIGATE button twice will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 sec onds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by pressing the LIFTGATE button located on the overhead console If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear pillar pushing this switch once will close the liftgate only The liftgate cannot be opened from this switch Power Open Close Left Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the LEFT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open Close the Left Power Sliding Door If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position Power Open Close Right Power Sliding Door If Equipped Press the RIGHT Power Sliding Door button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Power Open Close the Right Power Sliding Door If the button on the RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power closed the door will reverse to the full open position Turn Off Flash Lights with RKE Lock If Equipped This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equi
99. the storage bin UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 To Unfold Third Row Seats Tailgate Mode 1 Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the 1 Pull release strap 2 then pull release strap 3 to storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors rotate the entire seat rearward latch EY Fi Ss f LL i J E 2 Pull release strap marked 1 to unlock the recliner 3 Pulling strap 3 releases the seatback to return to its full upright position 4 Adjust the head restraint to the desired position WARNING In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be E 030905113 injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 and 3 2 To restore the seat to its upright position lift up on the seatback and push forward until the anchors latch 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING To avoid serious injury or death NEVER operate the vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in the tailgate mode DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED The Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be programmed to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote Ke
100. the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101 Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive clos
101. the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and
102. this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e If the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod c
103. time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 110 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet if equipped converts DC current to AC current and is located on the left rear trim panel immediately behind the second row left passenger seat This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter x 555035005140 Power Inverter Outlet 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The power inverter switc
104. to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle 060505160 Tools 1A Spare Tire Hook Piece 1 2A Winch T Handle Piece 1 1B Spare Tire Hook Piece 2 2B Winch T Handle Piece 2 1C Spare Tire Hook Piece 3 2C Winch T Handle Piece 3 N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413 CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 3 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle refer to 1 configura tion in tool graphics Tools 1A Spare Tire Hook Piece 1 2A Winch T Handle Piece 1 1B Spare Tire Hook Piece 2 2B Winch T Handle Piece 2 1C Spare Tire Hook Piece 3 2C Winch T Handle Piece 3 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift NOTE If either front tire is flat it may be necessary to jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle Refer to jack engagement locations in the following steps for proper j
105. to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 031505638 Washer And Wiper Controls 1 Front Mist Washer 3 Rear Wiper Washer 2 Wiper Speeds 1 Mist Front Wiper and Washer Press the end of the multifunction lever inward to the first detent and release to clear the windshield Pressing the multifunction lever inward to the second detent will NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 cause the washers to spray for a maximum of 10 seconds or until the multifunction lever is released and the wipers will cycle three times NOTE e If the multifunction lever is pressed while in the delay range the wipers will operate for several seconds after the multifunction lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected e If the multifunction lever is pressed while in the off position the wipers will operate for approximately two or three wipe cycles and automatically turn off 2 Intermittent Low and High Speed Wipers Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position then turn the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired delay inter val The delay can be regulated from approximately two 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshi
106. tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover In an accident serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down Storage Bin Cover Lock Release Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the unlocked position to allow greater access to the storage bin N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Storage Bin Safety Warning WARNING Continued Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open Keep the storage bin covers closed WARNING and latched while the vehicle is in motion e Do not operate the storage bin covers while the e Always close the storage bin covers when your veliclede inmotion vehicle is unattended Do not allow children to have access to the second row seat storage bins Once in the storage bin young children may not be able to escape If trapped in the storage bin children can die from suffocation or heat stroke e Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to avoid damage from contact with t
107. traction aids that meet capacity than what was originally equipped on SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index Proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain could result in tire overloading and failure You manufacturer could lose control and have an accident Continued NOTE Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire 362 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION CAUTION Continued To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the Install chains on the front wheels a tightly ae following precautions possible and then retighten after driving about e Use chains on P225 65R16 tires only P225 65R17 ae Oe tires do not provide adequate clearance Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Do not exceed 45 mph 70 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manuf
108. transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similarly to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON position 1 LOCK 2 ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The emergency key is also for locking the lower glove compartment You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the Key Fob to the LOCK pos
109. until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte I C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 2 If you c
110. weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR a STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty CAUTION weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR down low and be sure you distribute their weight as or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you way your vehicle handles This could cause you to have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight your vehicle Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 388 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration Note that LOADING TABLE EXAMPLE ONLY n
111. while inside the vehicle Press a second time to turn each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional arrows LED lamps only The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also illuminated from a light in the overhead console pre mium console only This light is turned on when the headlight switch is on and will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is rotated up or down Sunglass Storage non sunroof only At the rear of the front overhead console a compartment is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses From the closed position press the door over travel latch to open the compartment The door will slowly rotate to the full open position From this position the door can be fully closed or by rotating upward about 3 4 of the way and releasing positioned for conversation mirror use From the conversation mirror position the door can only be closed To return to the full open position the door must first be closed and then opened by pressing the over travel latch again to release NOTE The front overhead console supplied with fac tory sunroof incorporates a sunroof switch 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Overhead Consoles If Eguipped The rear overhead storage system is available in two versions with or without sunroof An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
112. will disappear 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again OVERHEAD CONSOLES Front Overhead Console Two versions of the overhead console are available The base front overhead console model featured fixed incan descent courtesy reading lights flip down sunglass stor age and conversation mirror The premium front over head console model features a LED focused light that illuminates the instrument panel cupholders Infrared Automatic Temperature Control Sensor ATC equipped only two swiveling LED lights flip down sunglass storage conversation mirror optional power sliding door switches and an optional power liftgate switch NOTE Premium sunroof console models include all of above except sunglass storage 81bf7b28 Front Premium Overhead Console Features 1 Cupholder LED 2 ATC Sensor 3 Interior Lights 4 Storage Mirror 5 Switch Bank NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Courtesy Interior Lighting At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights standard dome light has two buttons The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your vehicle is eguipped with Remote Keyless Entry RKE the lights will also tum on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed The courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on
113. will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level 326 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers The transaxle has only PRND shift positions Downshifts are carried out by an Electronic Range Select ERS by moving the lever while in the DRIVE position the instrument cluster will display transaxle gear selection as 6 5 4 3 2 1 for six speed and 4 3 2 1 for four speed transaxles Gear Ranges Do not race the engine when moving the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transaxle The engine can be started in this gear Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this gear When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the
114. window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS la Instrument Panel Features Mi Instrument Cluster SS SS SS W Instrument Cluster Descriptions ll Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC KEGU d sr se ES ou Gate HR 308 RE Fi MEE Reset DUNONs is oo d drucs Te 4 ee aes CO Compass Temperature Display N Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC IF Eotippedis se sae Res DE N de ie a RD d D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays O Trip Functions DO Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id O Operating Instructions Voice Command N Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM System VR If Equipped 258 Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack 7 Operating Instructions Uconnect phone PNG ut RAdIO 244 s EA RES MP ied 271 IP Bauipped sesegera tare sad 258 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 271 B Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio 258 O Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD 3 Clock Setting Procedure RER REN And MP3 Audio Play vis Ee SOUS d irat d 277 cn seile sake DEUR OE AE REED AD EE 260 H Notes On Playing MP3 Files 279 ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Ste
115. 4 Using the winch T handle rotate the drive nut to the right until the compact spare tire cover assembly is drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle 5 Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be overtightened Check under the vehicle to ensure the compact spare tire cover assembly is positioned cor rectly against the underside of the vehicle N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421 CAUTION CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed specifically to Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any stow a compact spare tire only Do not attempt to use other booster source with a system voltage greater the winch to stow the full size flat tire or any other than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor full size tire Vehicle damage may result alternator or electrical system may occur JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE WARNING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in When temperatures are below the freezing point another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly attempt jump starting because the battery could rup so please follow the procedures in this section carefully ture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be brought above freezing point b
116. 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants an
117. 6 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the battery door and transmitter housing apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the battery door and transmitter housing together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is approximately three years
118. ASSIST DISABLED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Service ParkSense When the ParkSense system is malfunctioning the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after mak ing sure the rear fascia bumper is free from snow ice mud dirt and debris see your authorized dealer Cleaning ParkSense Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could dam age the sensors EE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense Rear Park Assist system oper ating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of the ParkSense system When you turn ParkSense off the instrument clu
119. Assistance 505 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 506 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 506 E In Mexico Contact su s uus aao ER Xa x4 A3 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired IDD TTY D Service Contract Bl Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 508 EM MOPAR Parts aeos ie haee xad eoe go ds 508 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 508 O In The 50 United States And Washington p ER EE HE EE OE EE TE 508 O In Canada 504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id W Publication Order Forms 509 O IP3CHOB Grades pritari ones bust RS 511 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O lemperatire Grades M oa oh nde de ii o Quality Geiss PT 510 Tread Weal 4x cece GAS debut ew teen de 511 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 505 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be
120. CLE NN Id WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturers recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Automatic Transaxle The
121. Conditioning A C On Off 2 Blower Indicator 10 AUTO Mode Blower 1 Rear Blower Speed 4 Rear AIC Lock 3 Left Front Temperature 11 Front MODE 2 Rear Temperature Rear 5 Rear DEFROST 4 Rear Blower Temperature 12 RECIRCULATE System On Off Mode 3 Rear MODE 5 SYNC Indicator 13 Front DEFROST 6 A C Indicator 14 Front Blower Speed 7 Right Front Temperature 15 SYNC 8 Front MODE Indicator 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Front Upper ATC Panel and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC display along with three temperatures for driver front passenger and rear seats The system will then automati cally regulate the amount of airflow 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver front passen ger and rear seat rotary temperature knobs Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed
122. Do not use addi tion tional rust inhibitors or anti rust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze a minimum solution of 50 recommended MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant Five Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent in water should be used Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are antici pated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amoun
123. ES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 holder insert for both cavities can easily be removed for Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large cleaning The cupholders will also accommodate large storage area below size cups and 20 oz 6 L bottles ER Position 1 shows the console closed with four cupholders and a convenient storage tray on Console Position 2 Console Position 1 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Dual Storage Bins Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a rearward position This is accomplished by lifting the upper most latch at the front of the console This provides easy access to the storage area below and provides two of Console Position 3 Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost position Again lifting second latch handle at the front of the console allows complete access to a lower storage bin and provides additional cupholders for rear passengers Console Position 4 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 5 Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the To Remove The Premium Floor Console 1 Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the console 2 Lift the rear of the console up several inches centimeters 3 Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove console To reinstall the console 1 Position the console at a slight angle re
124. EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO A position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to the high beam position Refer to Mul tifunction Lever in this section for further information NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 25 mph 40 km h To Deactivate Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the SmartBeam system 1 Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights from the high beam to the low beam position 2 Rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO A to the on position NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Also dirt film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the multifunction lever Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to select the desired wiper speed NOTE Always remove any buildup of snow that pre vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return
125. G YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 13 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 14 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 15 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator 16 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator sh
126. HE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Eduipped CAUTION When using this feature the mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror base of the mirror A light next to the button will Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the illuminate when the dimming feature is activated mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will au
127. MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF a
128. N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 495 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary H Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning
129. N or ACC position and during power accessory delay 81bb70c3 Front Passenger Power Window Switches 1 Window Open Close 3 Doors Unlock 2 Doors Lock NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch If Equipped Second row passengers may open and close the sliding door window by a single switch on the door handle assembly The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position and during power acces sory delay NOTE The switches will not operate if the driver has activated the Power Window Lockout Sliding Door Power Window Switch NOTE The sliding door windows do not fully open stopping several inches above the window sill 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Auto Down Feature If Equipped The front window switches may be equipped with an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down automati cally To open the window part way press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes depending on the accessory delay setting after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped The front Driver switch may be equipped with an Auto Up feature Lift the window switch t
130. ND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four pin or a seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following four pin connector and seven pin connector illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 057003766 Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn STARTING AND OPERATING 401 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transaxle oo The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing However if freguent shifting occurs while in DRIVE move the shift lever into third gear with four speed transaxle or fifth ay gear with six speed transaxle NOTE Moving the shift lever into third gear with 057003785 four speed transaxle or fifth gear with six speed trans Seven Pin Connector axle while operating the vehicle under heavy operating 1 Battery 5 Ground conditions will improve performance and extend trans 2 Backup Lamps 6 Left Stop Tu
131. ND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPMS sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gage even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Lamp e Seasonal temperature change
132. NSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Ten different medias to choose from in each screen AM FM Sirius Radio Sirius Backseat TV DVD DVD2 Hard Disc Drive HDD AUX in radio AUXI AUX2 The LCD screen s are located in the overhead compart ment console 8161d54e VES Remote Control Location NOTE Refer to the Uconnect Multimedia section of Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Overhead Video Screens REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED 045105295 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 The right hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM or Tape to CD mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle The left hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch op eration in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable
133. OCK position and then pull up on the storage bin latch outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down To to open the cover assure the seatback is latched in the folded position additional downward pressure on the seatback may be reguired when folding LOCK POSITION 030905121 Storage Bin Cover Lock Release l j 030905122 Second Row Seatback Release Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 5 Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of the seat and tumble the seat forward into CAUTION the storage bin 43 F 2 M The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks which have minimal clearance to the cover WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched e DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open e Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion e DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down 030905123 Second Row Seat Release Strap 6 Close the storage bin cover To Unfold Second Row Seats 1 Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors I Am E mae ms mk 030905573 Second Row Seat Re
134. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the head restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch
135. Personal ete 445 494 REELE DEER SO UE PRA 253 Pets IranspOPHEP 24 44 odes pode ee S 95 526 INDEX NEE Id Phone Cellular 4229922943 aa 121 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 121 Placard Tire and Loading Information 350 Power Door LOOKS 25539222993 9 3 299 4 sheen E 92 ide AR N EO AE EE es 49 NONO x3 23x i34 ut R30 SAID OE DER 110 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 196 PCAs seres eN Mede D DRS de eS S 125 ode DOOR m 42 virt di AR EE OO EO ORE ET 334 335 KOEL 4444445 ERG REEDE RES GRADE N 193 liste m 36 Windows Express Down ss se 22 Power Steering Fluid eine tb Rer Roget a 483 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 66 Preparation tor Jacking is ciis ox CR HEER 409 Pretensioners Seat Belts ace scias BERE PERS BES EAE he does 60 Programmable Electronic Features 253 Radial Piy TOS sies bene HARD N AAR HE 307 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 449 452 Radi Opetalioi ios aucem a d Suh d pot sw dba 297 Radio Remote Controls llle 295 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 288 293 Rear Air Conditioning oe RES ex ome DE 304 311 Real Camera gegaaibaecoeesodeaoutaetues 182 Rear Cross Path 2 geutch aa hae o Goa a HERE 119 Real Heater acs PC 304 Rear Park sense DYStIGM 46024448 ce desi eas 172 Rear Window Defroster 008 215 Rearview Mirrors 44 35e ru dee RR e 4444 108 Reclining Front edle 1244 Ra pies ie oper sd 123 Recreationa
136. REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settin
137. Reverse When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button located in the end of the lever once and the cruise indicator light located in the mes sage window of the odometer will illuminate showing that the Electronic Speed Control system is on To turn the Electronic Speed Control system off push the ON OFF button a second time and both the Electronic Speed Control system and indicator will turn off 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and hav
138. S complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING e The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions Continued 342 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplan ing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP enhances direc tional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driv
139. Shoulder Anchorage 58 And Pregnant Women 645 64200444 EE onde 66 Child Restraint amp oce o d P Eae amp oe enaa 85 87 Extend 245724 62444 0455 SMS bres SAT EA 66 Front Seat EA be 39d paese Res Er KS 53 Ee ee MA ORE EES RU SCORE Vi E DE 100 Pretensioners SS eee ee eens 60 Red Seal 4 425464 5 eae eee ER EE 53 E 344 4 6640 604 or eea 122 ke EED si pic SU RSS G LR oe PES 122 Las Eli Pn 134 528 INDEX NEE Id Fold in Floor Stow n Go ss ss se 131 le le ARE EN ET Ree EE 126 ld SUPPO errati deies ence DEEL RAS 124 lir Ar 3 148 FONE uacua sa HA d US nu a E SS I OR EA 125 eli Em 123 Stow n Go Fold in Floor 131 TINS PPP 134 Security Alarm Theft Alarm us vues Ester ews 16 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 450 482 pentry Key Immobilizer x 3 due ones cena Gas 14 Sentry Key Programming me ER PREKE BE 16 Sentry Key Replacement uisa ve awe ee EER 15 Service Assistance 0 cee eee eee eee 505 Service Contract ia sko ar s ded d RUE ERROR Rea ees 507 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator SS SE ES 234 Service Manuals ss set e iek EER 0464540445 509 Setting the Clock 5 2044 KARRE ee es 258 260 263 273 Dees Personal s ER REEL UR DE ROES SS 259 Shoulder Belts 222a uere cb bo eo 6S oS HE 53 DIdG O a gy SEA en OORDE HAAR GER LENS 75 Iede UI su at ewe RR ee es 101 160 230 477 478 Sirius Backseat TV Uconnect studios 293 Puce DOOI ss
140. TE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIP
141. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M erk ocio NN CEN iic WARNING When the seatback release handle is lifted the seat back will rotate forward To avoid injury if you are not seated in the seat stay clear from the area in the path of the rotating seatback To swivel the seat Pull the lower handle on the outboard side of the seat and push the side of the seatback to begin rotation Once the seat begins to rotate the handle may be released The seat locks in position once reaching the forward or rearward positions only 030905114 Swivel n Go Seating Features 1 Moveable Armrest 4 Fore Aft Adjustment 2 Seatback Release 5 Seat Release 3 Swivel Release UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 WARNING Failure to comply with the following conditions could result in serious injury or even death e NEVER place any child seat or infant carrier in the Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing position The swivel seat should be locked in the forward position when using any child seat or infant carriers with the vehicle in motion Occupants riding in Swivel n Go seating must be wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked in either the forward facing or rearward facing position Make sure the Swivel n Go seat is in a locked position with the release handle fully engaged Test the seat after it is locked to see that it doesn t swivel 030905115
142. TION tab on the touch screen 4 All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio wi
143. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity If the opera tor desires more wiping sensitivity they may select sensitivity positions 4 or 5 If the operator desires less wiping sensitivity they may select sensitivity positions 2 or 1 Place the multifunction lever in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position e The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance e The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions e Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON and the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved or the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside temperature rises above freezing e Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Ra
144. This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat engere aie Two peo
145. UNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digii Character format types Program Type Deri 16 Digit Character rogram Type Displ isplay No program type Naas or undefined 7 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M By pressing the SEEK button when the
146. UR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files
147. UR VEHICLE NOTE Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit features in accordance with local laws WINDOWS Power Vent Windows If Equipped Switches on the driver s door trim panel let the driver operate the two vent windows from the driver s seat 021910419 Power Vent Window Switches Power Windows You can control either the front or rear windows using switches located on the driver s door trim panel The switches will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position and during power accessory delay NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Power Window Lockout Switch If Equipped The driver may lock out all power windows by depress ing the bar switch just below the power window switches 81b78a19 Driver s Power Window Switches 1 Left Rear 3 Left Front 2 Right Rear 4 Right Front NOTE Power Window switches will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been Power Window Lockout Switch turned to LOCK depending upon the accessory delay setting Opening a front door will cancel this feature 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Front Passenger Power Window Switch There is a single switch on the front passenger s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and locks and unlocks all doors The switch will operate only when the ignition switch is in the O
148. UR VEHICLE M WARNING If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury a OM 4 tt wD 035106942 Interior Bottle Holder Two outboard mesh pockets are on intermediate seating The mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes toys games or MP3 players etc Smoker s Package Kit If Equipped With the optional authorized dealer installed Smoker s Package Kit a removable ash receiver is inserted into one of the two cupholders in the center front instrument panel To install the ash receiver align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward Press the ash receiver into either of the cup wells to secure Pull upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning and or storage The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to accom modate a second ash receiver if desired NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 STORAGE Glove Compartments Upper Glove Compartment To open the upper compartment press inward on the release button 2 The door will spring open about 1 in 2 54 cm Manually lift the front edge of the door upward until fully opened and the detent is engaged To close the compartment door push firmly downward on the door s surface to release the detent and latch the door closed OS 81bb8b589 Glove Compartment Features 1
149. VS INU shi 29 p Parc repe DE te He 159 Dimmer Switch Headlight 223205444 BAR EE 156 Engine Temperature Warning 230 BXIGHOD 244444 ERRORES P PEN RR TES 101 FOS JP r 159 234 478 Hazard Warning Flasher 406 Headlight OWI sessie EED PERE a Gee eS 156 Headlights On Reminder s 22 9 500 5 nsi 159 Figh Beam Indicator 4 sos ded cas 30895454 234 a EEEELLLLIIIIILILIIIIUUIULIIIGILIIIULLILAGEILI POLILLAOALULILU ALLLLXI XA oODIHHIUUAIDUULULO TA LULUu INDEX 523 High Beam Low Beam Select 161 ING Re ENUY 2 44205 ER be hae eee ea 1t d 18 DCO vu ve we dan Se Gans EN 155 156 le A 460 Lights On Reminder uacua 4 2 vdd ores 199 Low Fuel ESE sape bee X Y x SV EP 227 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 234 Oil Pressure SS SS SS SS Se es 229 ea KO FEE EST N IE x Ma 156 477 Das AS aoc dct ci aru d d deer ird d eed 161 NE AAR ER Ne Go ae CE 3 96399 oP ae a 185 Koor GEED uu 2 624 CR GUERRE VOER RE 478 EE ME NAEL AE EE REUS UE E NUUS N 478 Seat Belt Reminder 4 29 HER ER es den 4 234 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 233 EES 4 44464 ERLA SAIS bts mE 3 475 476 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 234 Side Marker 422249 DE RR SR 477 478 SmartBeams sae da 6 RAAR DER KERE 161 524 INDEX NEE Id Theft Alarm Security Alarm x35 RR RR ER 233 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 228 TUG SION ee RE IE AT IRR ETASS 101 477 478 aco Tr 227 Warning Instru
150. able station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE
151. ac turer if different from the speed recommended by the vehicle manufacturer Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest different maximum speeds This notice applies to all Continued chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on All Season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow an
152. ack placement 81390be2 Spare Tire Hook And Removal 4 When the compact spare tire cover assembly is clear of the vehicle stand the tire cover assembly upright and remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retainer tabs together N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415 NOTE e Rear jack locations are between a pair of down facing tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle side body e Frontjack locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle side body and align with front door edges Sgueezing Winch Retainer Tabs 5 There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body These locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle body 416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 81bc524c Jack Location N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in Step 5 6 Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 7 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack
153. ading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary
154. ain on solid when a system fault is 368 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat pro viding the system fault still exists The TPMS Warning Lamp will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of excessive snow and or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a TPMS sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn on 3 After driving for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash
155. ain to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RBZ RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NO
156. ake your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the RESET button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Easy Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the RESET button until YES Y or NO N appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt MIRR In Reverse When this feature is selected and the vehicle is placed in a reverse gear the driver s side mirror will tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will ca
157. allow you to pull the wheel spacer out from under the vehicle WARNING A loose compact spare tire cover assembly thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the com pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place provided CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the winch T handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id 2 Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the spare tire hook and pull the wheel spacer from under the vehicle 3 Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is down and place the tire into the spare tire cover assem bly Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly so that the two retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on the opposite side CAUTION The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used when the compact spare tire is stored Failure to use this cover could drastically reduce the life of the compact spare tire WARNING Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer have been properly extended through the center of the wheel and spare tire cover assembly Failure to properly engage both retainer tabs could result in loss of the spare tire and cover assembly which will cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of vehicle control
158. and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 8 Remove the wheel lug nuts for vehicles with wheel covers remove the cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 9 Install the compact spare tire Lightly tighten the lug nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE e Do not install the wheel cover on the compact spare e Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers 418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id 10 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 11 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 12 Lower the jack to its fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 13 Place the deflated flat tire and compact spare tire cover assembly in the rear cargo area Do not stow the deflated tire in the
159. ar slightly higher than the front 2 Slide the console forward into the floor bracket 3 Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting on the floor bracket 4 Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated in the rear floor bracket removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E NOTE CAUTION Continued e You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime by pressing the rear window defroster switch a second Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra ime sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear win Keep all objects a safe distance from the window dow defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM The automatic load leveling system will provide a level Failure to follow these cautions can cause
160. are released Other wise damage to the steering column or shift lever could result 328 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE Six Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However use the Electronic Range Select ERS mode by moving the lever and select the 5 range when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 5 range will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup DRIVE Four Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upsh
161. arning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural air pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on In this situation the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value 366 STARTING A
162. automatic transaxle and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid All four speed transaxles are equipped with a conven tional filler tube and dipstick If fluid is added it should be added through the filler tube All six speed transaxles are equipped with a capped dipstick tube It is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transaxle only 7 the approved lubricant may be used 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transaxle shift guality and or torgue converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in
163. auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM S STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO J NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right 042305233 side of the radio faceplate RES RSC Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listen
164. axi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 494 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E OD Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV Joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N
165. back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The jack jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed WARNING behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area Turn the two cover latches to release the cover at e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas If it is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from 060505161 under the vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to Jack And Tool Location moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack jack avoid the danger of being hit P 5 J J handle and tools N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 Spare Tire Removal The spare tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the center of the vehicle between the front doors by means of a cable winch mechanism The spare tire drive nut is located o
166. ber also appears on the Auto um mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window Vehicle Identification Number on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN Eed INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 2 ll A Word About Your Keys sesse se ee 12 Mi Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 O How To Use Remote Start 27 Eed c A rcm 14 M Door Locks es seeks TT TP 30 E Replacement Keys is o9 BE RC LE RR 15 A Manual Door Locks 44244944 EE EE ER HE 30 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 16 O Power Door Locks If Equipped 32 O Rearming Of The System 17 MIS EES TE EEN OE eure ee 36 H Illuminated Entry If Equipped 18 O Power Vent Windows If Equipped 36 lll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 19 O Power WindOWS 4 062204 lt 40 4 GER DR ORR 36 O Using The RKE Transmitter 20 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id ll Sliding Side Door O Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped O Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock N Liftgate
167. bol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change interval d 6 000 miles 10 000 k i ths intervals excee 00 miles m or six months CAUTION whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 3L amp 3 8L Gasoline Engines SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintainin
168. bon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly e To prevent carbon monoxide poisoning DO NOT inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monox ide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill NEVER run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and NEVER sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 3L ENGINES ONLY IF running for more than a short period adjust the EQUIPPED ventilation system to force fresh outside air into l the vehicle E85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve hicles FFV only These vehicles can be identified by the unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E85 or Unleaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 379 the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and oe gasoline only powered vehicles Only vehicles with the E85 fuel fill
169. brate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approxi mately 10 seconds until the current variance zone num ber is displayed 3 Release the CMTC reset button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system conveniently allows the driver to select a EVIC IF EQUIPPED variety of useful information by pressing the switches The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the tures a driver interactive display that is located in the following instrument cluster System Status display e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Audio Modes display 041005524 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EVIC Menu Step Contr
170. can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow 045607541 NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode R Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Mix Mode Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary
171. cator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled at over 18 mph 29 km h for approximately 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert the driver High Low Beam Switch When the headlights are turned on pushing the multi function lever toward the instrument panel will switch from low beams to high beams Pulling back to the neutral position returns the headlights to the low beam operation Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released SmartBeam If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle spe cific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view To Activate 1 Select Automatic High Beams ON through the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center
172. ch Each of these outlets can support 160 Watts 13 Amps Do not exceed 160 Watts 13 Amps for each of these outlets The power outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or battery symbol indicating the power source The power outlet located on the lower instrument panel is powered directly from the battery Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of
173. ck when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears RKE Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Driver Door Ist Press or All Doors 1st Press appears RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings will return to the memory set position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the door mounted switch Pressing the RESET button when in this display will select Yes or No Flash Lamp Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To m
174. collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR If Equipped These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact reguire the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy In case of AHR deployment both driver and front passenger seat AHR s will be deployed When AHR s deploy during a rear impact the head restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of ad 022607508 rear end impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or TY i __ Head Restraint Front Half not deploy in the event of a front or side impact Soft Foam and Trim Coven However if during a front impact a secondary rear 4 Head Restraint Guide 2 Seatback Tub impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever U
175. control unit located on the instrument panel NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the RR position do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed The rear blower control located in the rear overhead console has an off position and a range of blower speeds This allows the second row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control system through an intake grille located in the right side trim panel behind the third row seats The heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control The rear mode selection RR allows the settings to be controlled by the rear mode control knob To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for cold air and clockwise for heated air When rear controls are locked by the front system the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable Rear Mode Control Headliner Mode gt Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct th
176. ct you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer 508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle componen
177. curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 WARNING The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have placed the shift lever into the PARK position e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Look at the shift indicator window on the console to those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles ensure the shift lever is in the PARK position you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always move the shift lever into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition switch and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition switch the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against un wanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children or pets inside a vehicle e When moving the shift lever into PARK press the button on the shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops e When engaged in PARK you will not be able to move the shift lever rearward without pressing the shift lever button CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from OFF to ACC ON so the steering wheel and shift lever
178. current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word
179. d be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Consult with your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and Electronic Stability Program ESP These systems complement the Anti Lock Brake System ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneu vers Traction Control System TCS The Traction Control System TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide en hanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning whe
180. d cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs NOTE 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs e The following table shows examples on how to calcu 295 Kg late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load
181. d ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system
182. d for carrying children in the front passenger seat However if you must carry a child in a vehicle without a rear seat the passenger seat should be moved to the full rearward position and the child must be in a proper restraint system based on its age size and weight 81ce4b6b Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger seat Use this tether anchor to secure only forward facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether strap WARNING Rearward facing infant restraints must never be se cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag In an accident a passenger airbag may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants riding in rearward facing infant restraints Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat Delete Feature Commercial Vehicles Only There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child e The rearward facing infant carrier is for babies weigh ing up to about 20 lbs 9 kg and less than one year old THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE LETE FEATURE Commercial Vehicles Only e The forward facing child seat is for children from about 20 to 40
183. d off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal The sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 034903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is ba
184. d up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropria
185. d wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed 364 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is shown in the following TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS diagram ED C ME 055707139 Tire Rotation The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the cold inflation tire pressure requirements found on the tire placard located on the driver s side B pillar The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure w
186. damage to riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading the heating elements conditions e Use care when washing the inside of the rear A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height It takes approximately 1 mile 1 6 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on road surface conditions window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours the leveling system will bleed itself down The Continued i vehicle must be driven to reset the system NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EGUIPPED The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles eguipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity To move the crossbars loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately six tur
187. de manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the STEP button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button to start the cali bration The CAL indicator will be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings ON 6 7 8 Compass Variance Map 040506040 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the compass button for approximately two seconds NE
188. dio Operation And Cellular Phones 297 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id W Climate Controls Es Es sd ee 297 O Summer Operation 314 D Manual Heating And Air Conditioning O Winter OPTIO oos wea vu oo RR oe E 315 System TE x O Vacaton Storage sin bt SEG LER 315 MM erem mn ap T Window Fogging eee 315 Ress EE EE E Oulside Air Intake 222 Hhe5 4s duet RES 315 I PQUIDPCG 26520 sop SUPERO kee ae 304 BA beide TPS rasprostire rer BAD 4844 316 O Automatic Temperature Control ATC o A C Air Filter If Equipped sees es 316 Eae i EEE EE PE 306 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81bb7b62 1 Air Vents 5 Analog Clock 9 DVD If Equipped 13 Switch Bank 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Upper Glove Compartment 10 Cup Holders 14 Ignition Switch 3 Shift Lever 7 Lower Glove Compartment 11 Storage Bin 15 Dimmer Switch 4 Radio 8 Climate Controls 12 Power Supply 12V 16 Headlight Switch 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER a an L l Brake C 60 ESP BAS 81c6a2b2 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added
189. down on the front foot well area while in courtesy mode for added convenience 81bb8b85 Q Overhead Compartment Features 1 DVD 5 Storage 2 Rear HVAC 6 DVD 3 Interior Lights 7 Interior Lights 4 Storage 8 Halo Lighting If equipped otherwise storage N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Rear Courtesy Reading Lights If Eguipped The overhead console has two sets of courtesy lights The lights turn on when a front door a sliding door or the liftgate is opened If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry RKE the lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed The courtesy lights also function as reading lights Press in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle Press the lens a second time to turn each light off You may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the outside ring which is identified with four directional arrows Rear Console Halo Lighting The rear overhead console has recessed halo lighting around the perimeter of the console base This feature provides additional lighting options while traveling and is controlled by the headlight switch Refer to Lights Halo Lights If Equipped in Understanding the Features Of Your Vehicle for further information GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate d
190. e Hi s vut BATTERY HEATED MERE serm rae SEAT BELT Sii Used lr M CHILD SEAT REEZHZMITHIA CHADH rir TETHEB ANCHO BUTTON S7 vo Cw 4 b 0 LOWER ANCHORS abaw mG POWER SUGING DOOR El een ei kiGHTEIN AND TEPHER FOR UCONNWEET ATEUENO Lum AE N Fi OREM LATEN purTON SRS ie C E E RIRBRG f ium gi id Ii Ld BAL iE TION TRAS EGRE CONANT SUFFLEMENI L PLAS ERE DODA LLS DGNVERTISILE DCONVERTIELE MEE QWNERCS Iu porrATOR LHSHT DIL TEMP TEMPERATURE BESTRAINT SYSTEM AIR OFF TOP HWH TOP UF MA MIN SEP INTRODUCTION 5 ESP BAS LECTIROMIC STABILTEY PROGRAM DASE ASE ST TEM 0 i ENETH KILL DESCENT Vee PARON EOMNTHOL BHAKE es ALL EL FAILUHE OF ANTHUSCH mwE BARI ETSTEM ELECTR OMS D AWDI 4WD BRAKE ERARE 5YBTTM FOUR WHEEL WARWPMG PARR BERE BRAHE TOW HAUL Vea pera TEIW ALL 4 LOW HAZARD Foia WHEEL Dre LOr AIC PUSH OFF WC ME oon CUOFHTHTIOWER ERES it 01 0507683 6 INTRODUCTION NN Id WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This num
191. e ity and type of the impact Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 022607757 SS 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha 022607497 nism 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEF
192. e Protection sies 40824604 159 Belts Seat 224446 6544044404 025 5 Roe eed 100 Bind Spot MORIODDS q serpa aak RE BEE EE up 112 Body Mechanism Lubrication 447 B Pillar Location lt 4 ce ceed tn ms 350 Brake Assist Systemi ed seres 09 52 HEN eso 341 Brake Control System Electronic 340 Brake DIG 2 2 duces Cane eee ns oboe tReet ee 483 Drake POtKIIE c 2442645204 p 54545960855 335 Didke my SIC soseer ee eee a wey eee PR E S 454 Fl id Check os doa dra xui det PC REA 455 Vi ie io LENT Mr 291 BRAGS OR AN OO eve eed ee 43493243 454 Brake Transmission Interlock 325 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 98 Bulb Replacement aoro bie HR PR wore i 476 Bulbs LIEDE 54544 444684845 SE OE ET 101 475 Calibration Compass 43a 9 ie er VR A43 244 251 Camera SE ues oases SR E UP AREE ee 182 516 INDEX NEE Id CdDagueb Pd 4425540 RR E LR READ PS S 481 Caps Filler Duel fone ces cu pod ees eee ee wae 382 SEIE na csp 439 POWer CEOE as ue adc oie dicta d est EE De 335 Radiator Coolant Pressure 452 S 04 ro aa ean EER BEE AUS RE BROERS TETT 461 Carbon Monoxide Warning 997376 Cargo Compartment Lupea e CORMer cad 9 dera fee HERRIE a ZI Cargo Vehicle Loading aw ue pacis sep DEPT a 210 Caution Exhaust Gas leeren 51 378 Cellular Phone leen 121 297 Center High Mounted Stop Light 480 Chains Tire
193. e TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses KR55120125 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 3L and 3 8L Engine All engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular
194. e 436 508 Multi Function Control Lever 160 Navigation System Uuconnect gps 182 New Vehicle Break In Period 98 Occupant Restraints ske dn ED EE goa 52 793 77 Occupant Restraints Sedan 69 70 73 76 Odometer 6454445 AAS OK EN IE us 239 Oil Change Indicator 22s ase MRK sae as 239 240 248 Oil Change Indicator Reset sc cosa HE 239 240 248 Oil BEE spesse 9 0 280A RAPI REO E 437 482 Al MERE EES EED Ea EN 481 Change Interval uu Sor xS Yd ce dete d BEDE 438 CHECKIN A 437 bro 440 Piter 46 64 ooo ko EE NE OE OF ETE 440 482 Piter Disposal 24 3 sege 5 bop READ ex 440 ldentifnication LOCO ui caer e826 BAR fub die eode 438 Materials Added 10 1 ia ESE EERS su DE AE Rg 439 Recommendation een 438 481 ie iio TET 439 MISCOBIDU oak esos P aC GUOC E EROR RUP Ke 439 48 Onboard Diagnostic System 433 434 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 187 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 108 109 Overhead CONGOS Mee DEER dee sata dae 184 Overhead Travel Information Center 184 Overheating BASIE as tierce ped t ee coe 236 406 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 509 PamiCAlatm 22 232 e 44 pEGRG Re X3 iius 23 Park Sense System REAT 235049545 beg egens 172 Parking Drake 2 5 3 2244 P EO Y EO TE REED S 335 Pedak Adjustable oof 8s see 6x RE OX RA 167
195. e Cluster gATE gASCAP noFUSE CHangE OIL LoCOOL Lo WASH etc push and hold the button until the display resets approximately two seconds 23 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 24 Message Display Area When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display ECO 2446666664440 hi DE Fuel Saver Indicator Off ECO 0on Fuel Saver Indicator On an i ee a ee ee Door Ajar MOOG M TEEL ST HIE ET Hood Ajar PALEIS ER RO OT PPP TE EE Liftgate Ajar LOW tirE SS Low Tire Pressure gASCAP 0 00008 Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE sees Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required CRUISE iue utm d RR OR d Cruise Control On LoCOOQOL ss ke RES Deb Re eee SE Low Coolant LoWASH Low Washer Fluid 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN esee NOTE Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Compass Mini Trip Computer Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display Area located in the instru ment cluster Refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC Display If Equipped Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Display If Equipped for further information ECO ECO on Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO
196. e DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is Operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter I 9 072607165 1 Open the glove compartment and remove all contents m A C Air Filter Replacement 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing 2 Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door EE LE AE 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 CAUTION The A C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through th
197. e Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 514 INDEX NEE Id Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 451 POCA IVC PET 382 Adae Washer Fluid sa ads SKERP RE wong 448 Additives Fuel o px aeq eked abe eh dee comers 376 He ble Pedals wins ho MEER KA SR EE 167 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 440 Air Conditioner Maintenance sie xxx xS 444 Pir CONGINONING eesti o dddes AE ERA E RD ed 297 Air Conditioning Controls vassduesdu ce reus 297 Air Conditioning Filter ss 44 4 ses sias adaa 316 446 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 316 Air Conditioning Rear Zone 304 311 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 444 Air Conditioning System 297 306 444 Air Conditioning System Zone Control 302 Air Pressure Tires 4 44 eke dex a os RAED EER 300 ide 244 0545 tee EE OT eh esas ee 66 76 Airbag Deployment sos ke REED eases os y AIBDdS LIS TER ET EE eps 67 74 79 100 235 Da Moi iese AU EE RE RE ROER eee es 4 78 ANDID ide sies REEDE DRA DRS 69 73 75 76 Airbag Window Side Curtain
198. e an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET lever downward and then release Lift your foot off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Deactivating Electronic Speed Control A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever CANCEL toward you will deacti vate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed memory Resuming Speed To resume a previously set speed raise the Electronic Speed Control lever RESUME ACCEL upward and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h Varying The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while El
199. e another recall can be selected To Disable RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 2 Press and release MEMORY button 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continu ing to Step 3 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 3 Press and release the memory SET S button located on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling that you are in the memory set mode 4 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door A chime will sound signaling to you that the driver memory has been set 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter A chime will sound signaling to you that the RKE transmitter link has been successfully disabled To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either Memory Position repeat Steps 1 to 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat ONLY This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the drive
200. e bench seat does not stow in the floor it is removable for added cargo space Release levers are located on the rear leg assemblies near the floor To remove the seat squeeze each release handle and rotate downwards to deploy the wheels A lock indicator button pops up when the seat is unlocked The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle and moved on its Easy Out Rollers 030905893 Release Handles To reinstall the seat align the seat into the detent posi tions on the floor Squeeze the release handle and rotate upward until the lock indicator button returns into the handle WARNING If not properly latched the bench seats could become loose Personal injuries could result After reinstall ing these seats be sure the red indicator button on the release handles return into the handles Third Row Power Recline If Equipped The power recline feature located on the side of the seat cushion adjusts the seatback angle forward rearward for occupant comfort 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Ne Pe Third Row Power Seat Switch Third Row Power Seat Switch If Eguipped A one touch power folding seat switch is located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch bank The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is in PARK NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Rear Panel Power Switch Bank The rear switch bank allows multipl
201. e entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible ca
202. e filter Failure to prop erly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Rotate the glove compartment door back into position Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blade
203. e flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Ps 9 Air comes from the floor outlets Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped e Front Three Zone ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings e Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation by a button press on the right rotary knob and a comfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on the control unit e The system can be controlled manually if desired e SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones allowing one comfort setting driver setting for the cabin if desired The Three Zone ATC System automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers The system automatically adjusts the air temperature the airflow volume amount of outside air recirculation and the airflow direction This maintains a comfortable temperature even under changing condi tions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 045605176 81dc95d4 Front Upper ATC Panel Front Lower ATC Panel 1 System On Off 9 Air
204. e front anchor cup plug hole is centered on the winch hole 4 Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down ward on the console with slight pressure reinstall the cover plug 5 Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched WARNING In an accident serious injury could result if the removable floor console is not properly installed Always be sure the removable floor console is fully latched Premium Console If Equipped The three compartment console with sliding storage bin sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage bin offers multiple configurations e Four cupholders with dishwasher safe liners for clean ing The cupholders can accept plastic bottles large cups or mugs with handles 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Top tray storage Upper storage bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin CDs or other items Large console center storage will store headphones for the available rear DVD entertainment system or other items 12 Volt DC power outlet provides continuous power inside the console for cell phones or other electronics Rear occupant accessible 81c27ac2 Multiple adjustments Premium Console Features Removable from vehicle for additional floor space 1 Top Release 3 Console Release 2 Center Release The top and center console sections slide forward and rearward to provide added user comfort A one piece cup NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATUR
205. e menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate u SINGLE DISC MPI m E 3p cm 042305232 RES Radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to tum on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold
206. e outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights
207. e power folding and 1 Open to Normal 4 Fold Flat nfoldin itions for the third r 2 Stow 5 Right Left Seats unfolding positions for the third row seats 3 Tailgate EE Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or together The third row power folding seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE 2 Pull release strap marked 71 located on the rear of the e Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the small seat to lower the seatback buckle and lower the head restraints before attempting Pull rel t ked 2 to rel th hors to fold stow the power third row seats i n Mod donem s de Be ed n tenn DS e To abort seat operation while seat is in motion press a different seat position selector switch to stop the seat Once the seat stops moving then the desired position can be selected e The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection for safe operation When the system detects an obstacle the motors will stop and reverse the motion a short distance to move the seat away from the obstacle Should this occur remove the obstacle and press the button again for the desired position To Fold Third Row Seats Manually If Equipped Folding Third Row Seat Strap 4 Pull release strap marked 3 and tumble the seat 1 Lower the head restraint to its full down position l rearward into
208. e statement Load To This Line This line indicates how far rearward cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate closing N 035203808 Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit NOTE With all rear seats stowed or removed 4 x 8 foot sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position CONSOLE FEATURES There are two consoles available Basic and Premium Basic Console Basic Console features consist of the following e The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to easily pass through the first row to the second e Four cupholders accept up to extra large size beverage cups or 20 oz 6 L plastic bottles Cupholders are dishwasher safe for cleaning e The cupholders are removable to access a large storage bin N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 e The basic console is removable from the vehicle for additional floor space by removing the cap and clip at the console base To Remove The Basic Floor Console 1 Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip 2 Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to clear the rear load floor hook 3 Remove the console To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console 1 Position the console at a slight angle front slightly higher than the rear 2 Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket hook 3 Align the console until th
209. e the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul der belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in t
210. e within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock parking lights will flash and horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If your power door locks were unlocked Remote Start will automatically lock the doors e The park lights will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be turned to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a Remote Start you must first unlock the vehicle using the UNLOCK button on the transmitter After the vehicle is unlocked you can enter the vehicle insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and move it to the ON position otherwise the engine will shut off at the end of 15 minute cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the Key Fob into the
211. ead in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together s 022605153 Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle plate into the buckle until you hear a click nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision 022605154 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could e
212. ealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 6 Oil Pressure Warning Light qm This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 7 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi see tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 8 Speedometer I
213. ear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior ee trim but they will open during airbag deployment Front Airbag Components Airbag System Components 1 Driver and Passenger Air 2 Knee Bolsters bags The airbag system consists of the following NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC regulations for Advanced Airbags e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e Front Passenger Airbag e Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger if eguipped e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if eguipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impact sensors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediatel
214. eature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the power door locks lock or unlock e On vehicles eguipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e On vehicles not equipped with the optional EVIC perform the following steps 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure 3 Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition Key Fob from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position a minimum of five times ending in the ON position do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door lock switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard the program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If neces sary repeat the previous procedure The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the EVIC Customer Programmable Features on vehicles so equipped 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YO
215. econds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the Automatic System off turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O off position 81bc85ed Automatic Headlights NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the Automatic mode 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Headlights On With Wipers If Equipped When your headlights are in the Automatic mode and the engine is running the headlights will automatically turn on when the wiper system is also turned on Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Delay If Equipped This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The 90 second delay inter val begins when headlight switch is turned off If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON the delay will be cancelled When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 30 60 or 90 seconds or not remain on To change the timer setting see your autho r
216. ectronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever in SET DECEL If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE CEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases Accelerating To Pass Press the accelerator as you normally would When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Your vehicle may experience a downshift automatic transmissions only while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed WARNINCG Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE
217. ed NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS W Hazard Warning Flasher 406 B8 If Your Engine Overheats 406 W Jacking And Tire Changing 408 Alack Location 2999 AO OO a eee he 408 ES pare Lite REMOVAL x ce seh Ee ES AR 409 O Preparations Por Jacking vs Rs 409 El Jacking INSWUCHONS x scu oes m ot sei 410 O Wheel Nuts 42cm E PETERE 418 O Secure The Spare Tire B Jump Starting Procedure O Preparations For Jump Start OJump Starting Procedure W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Mi Towing A Disabled Vehicle o Towing With The Ignition Key 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the center of the instrument panel above the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is OFF
218. ed Please see Tread Wear Indicators and Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service descrip tion and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment manufacturer or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi cations or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read sion components You could lose control and have ings an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Use only compact chains or other
219. ed Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of 2 the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Eguipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes th
220. efore attempting a jump start NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions 422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 03962 i 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission Positive Battery Post into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423 3 If using a another vehicle to jump start the battery CAUTION park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jump
221. ehicle is in motion e NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole in stalled Continued 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To separate the table top from the pole follow these steps 1 Locate the release latch on the underside of the table top 81bd165d Table Top Release 2 Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the release from the pole 3 While pulling on the latch pull upward to remove the table top from the pole NOTE The table top should be removed from the leg prior to removing the leg from its mounting base 4 Locate the release button on the pole Press the release button firmly to activate the release from the base 5 While pressing the release button twist the pole in a counterclockwise rotation until it stops Pull upward to remove the pole from the base 6 Place the pole on the underside of the table top and secure with the hook and loop straps 7 Once the pole and table top are secured you may place them in the floor storage bin in front of the second row seats NOTE Always store the table and pole in the floor storage bin when not in use NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and some front seats The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped While th
222. either the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been Front Axle Rear Axle exceeded Empty Weight 2 140 lbs 1 470 lbs 971 kg 667 kg Load Driver 360 lbs 163 kg 980 lbs 445 kg passengers and cargo luggage TOTAL 2 500 Ibs 2 450 Ibs 1 134 kg 1 111 kg GAWR 2 544 lbs 2 544 lbs 1 154 kg 1 154 kg f 3 Z i A loaded vehicle is shown in the above table Note that neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been 808cf051 exceeded NOTE Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label at tached to the rear of the driver s door for your vehicle s GVWR and GAWR s This table is only an example ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will as sist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW T
223. el This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel e The ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instru This indicates that the TCS is active If the to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road that is not spinning This feature remains active even if the ESP is in the Partial Off mode ment cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin indicator light flashes during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure conditions and do not switch off the ESP or TCS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 WARNING e The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded e The TCS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a TCS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Brake Assist System BAS The Brake Assist System BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency brak ing maneuvers The system detects an emergency brak ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BA
224. eld could lead to an accident You might not see other seconds to a maximum of 20 seconds between cycles The time delay will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph 16 km h Low speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction lever past the intermittent settings to the first detent High speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction lever past the intermittent settings to the second detent 3 Rear Wiper and Washer Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the rear intermittent wipers To activate the washers rotate the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray until the ring is released and then resume the intermit tent interval NOTE Rear window wipers function in the intermittent wiper speed only vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of the five intermittent wiper sensitivity settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the multifunction lever Wiper sensitivity position 3 has been NN b UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
225. ent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is
226. er and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately four to six seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on after the approximate four to six second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to recor
227. er and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP On This mode is the normal operating mode for ESP on two wheel drive vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned off for specific reasons as noted below ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 ESP Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch located in the center switch bank next to the hazard flasher switch When in the Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated When in the Partial Off mode ESP will operate without engine torque management This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On
228. er cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
229. er door label can operate on E85 81ae46ab 81ae46a9 E85 Fuel Cap E85 Badge 380 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Ethanol Fuel E85 E85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame Fuel Requirements If your vehicle is E85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E85 fuel or any mixture of these two fuels For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e Use seasonally adjusted E85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 e Some additive
230. er strap is centered between the headrest supports underneath the head rest 4 Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether strap attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat 5 Following the child seat manufacturer s instructions tighten the child restraint tether strap 6 Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might affect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE Contact your authorized deal ership for a replacement part 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with a child restraint only It should not be used for any other purpose Before use inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks abrasions discoloration and loose threads If these or any other condition that might affect the performance of the strap is observed DO NOT USE that strap Personal injury may result Contact your authorized dealership for a replacement part ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits o
231. er the blind spot zones from the rear front side of the vehicle uU 030405533 Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started the BSM warning light will be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the system is opera tional The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane on both sides of the vehicle 11 ft or 3 35 m The zone starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends ap proximately 20 ft 6 m to the rear of the vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approxi mately 6 mph 10 km h or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas NOTE e The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones e The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if your vehicle is towing a trailer Therefore visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change If the trailer or other object i e bicycle sports equipment extends 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE beyond the side of your vehicle this may result in the BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire time the
232. er to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen The Park View camera is located in the light bar over the rear license plate check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 CAUTION Continued 4 Enable or disable the rear
233. ertently fueled with E85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold driveability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter 376 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be reguired for prolonged exposure to E85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline Materia
234. eting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting SLIDING SIDE DOOR The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the sliding door The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back Rocking the handle back wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME To keep your door operating properly observe the fol lowing guidelines e Always open the door smoothly e Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open ing the door This is very important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction e There is a hold open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline To close the sliding door after the hold open latch is activated you must rock the inside handle forward or pull
235. evices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TS The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner WARNING or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan HomeLink Buttons gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can rity Alarm is active cause serious injury or death 81cb44fe N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds unti
236. exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 MPEG 1 Au 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 60 64 56 46 40 32
237. f local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO SENG AREA Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area Do not allow people to ride in
238. filter Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary necessary Inspect the CV Joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 102 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the ignition cables 3 3L and Replace the air conditioning filter 3 8L engines Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the spark plugs 3 3L 3 8L Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for and 4 0L engines damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Replace the timing belt 4 0L engine Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done
239. g If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device durin
240. g Flash Lights feature is enabled the tail lights will flash to Pushing once will only close the liftgate This button signal that the liftgate is opening or closing cannot be used to open the liftgate bes ie dn WARNING During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away NOTE e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance xt vedi Rear Power Liftgate Switch N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open or close positions for any of the buttons to operate If the liftgate is not in the full open or close positions it must be opened or closed manually If the liftgate release button is activated while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the shift lever is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 12 F 24 C or temperatures above 143 F 62 C Be sure to
241. g follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de wiring including adding any kind of badges or ployed If you are involved in another collision the stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the airbags will not be in place to protect you upper right side of the instrument panel Do not OWARNINGE modify the front bumper vehicle body structure WARNING or add aftermarket side steps or running boards Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the protect you in another collision Have the airbags SEDE iem yours N Boeri kel n die wre works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized Continued dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cov
242. g Your Vehicle for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 4 0L Gasoline Engines SAE 10W 30 engine oil is preferred for all operating temperatures Your engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifica tion mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station o
243. g proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service atten dant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle only needs to be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor
244. g the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door Opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any proble
245. gaso 800dtab line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 374 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 4 0L Engine The 4 0L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica tions the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions engine performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC spec
246. ge the engine oil and engine oil filter E L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV Joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 493 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transaxle fluid amp filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police t
247. government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The 512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under th
248. gs Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 E BRAE LJ a a The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instru ment cluster s EVIC display It provides both visual and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle E a L E E a LI LJ E E E L LI maun SEE a tann SEE ParkSense Warning Display 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status LELLI EE TETE N E E E E oo EE F LJ od E s HETE FETTE TETE FE a L og OW LE LIT LII IE EN FREED E a LE a L LI i a IT Hg n EE me LD pre LI wd L i W aum an C ou B Park Assist Disabled 032809216 Park Assist ON N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a 2 second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous s E a aa LII LLL casos NEE aa LIII BREE FETTE LIE SERRE FREES FENE a a a a am m a ELTETT E LI EN E LI Lj LELETET ai i 808880 LETEL E S E E LE LE a
249. h 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch the Electronic Stability Program ESP to Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting and Operating for further information 426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h CAUTION Exceeding these towing limits may cause severe Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed If the transmission is inoperative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE CAUTION Towing With The Ignition Key Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will result e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL Con
250. h Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out sis the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for comfort Turn te on and set the mode control to the 9 P position e Cool Sunny Operate in d position Cool amp Humid conditions e Set the mode control to 4 igh and turn on 66 6 6 456 6466 to keep windows clear e set the mode control to the ig position If windshield Cold Weather fogging starts to occur move the control towards the 4 gt position 8000cb71 A C Air Filter If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con trol ATC the climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air Refer to Air Conditioning in Maintaining Your Vehicle for filter replacement instructions STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Mi Starting Procedures ss sd es 321 D Automatic Transaxle Es SEE 321 HL Normal Starting sas osis yak eR eee 321 O Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C 322 ELIE The Engine Fails Io Start sesser sses s 322 MANET OES epaia asp a EES b ES 323 N Engine Block Heater If Equipped 323 Mi Automatic Transaxle 324 OKey Ignition Park Interlock O Brake Transaxle Interlock System D Four Speed Or Six Speed Automatic Eise areara e neess nase eee EERS Peer cuc P Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces H Veru l o varo DP oe EN eee PRE mk
251. h an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured Closing the Sunroof Manually To close the sunroof from an open or vent position press and hold the switch forward The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically Release the switch to stop sun roof travel at any point Sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunroof sunshade can be opened manually How ever the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the power sun roof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Express Open Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Express Vent Press and release the V button and the sunroof will automatically open to the vent position This is called Express Vent Express Close Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from a
252. h is located near the center of CUPHOLDERS the instrument panel below the two 12 Volt power There are nine cupholders in the interior Two cupholders outlets in the center front instrument panel four in the floor consoles and three more are located in the third row To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press quarter trim panel the switch a second time to turn the power outlet off ze All liners are removable for cleaning Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer or tray starting at one edge for easy removal Refer to Cleaning The Instru ment Panel Cupholders in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 035005141 Power Inverter Switch N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 Instrument Panel Cupholders Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops and place the The instrument panel cupholders are located in a pull out container to be held in either one of the cupholder wells The cupholders are designed to accommodate a wide variety of container types and sizes Press down on the container to engage the cupholder retention features Interior Bottle Holders There are four bottle holders located in the interior One bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim panels and one bottle holder is molded into each side sliding interior door trim panel Each holder accommo dates up to a 20 oz 6 L plastic bottle Front Cupholders 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YO
253. hbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone lf Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 UconnectTM Multimedia SIRIUS BACKSEAT TVTM IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio SIRIUS Back seat TV offers three video channels for family enter tainment directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii or Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES RER Navigation RBZ Multimedia or REN Multimedia User Manuals for detailed operating instructions VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES is available with One or two video screens Third row swivel screen If Equipped Additional single disc DVD player with two screen system Battery powered two channel remote control Two remote headphones Integrated remote storage in either screen location Three different medias can be played simultaneously Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2 Easy menu driven functions on touch screen radios Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating area 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR I
254. he GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 390 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping
255. he center of the seat NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of colli
256. he front seat tracks In an accident serious injury could result if the which have minimal clearance to the cover seat storage bin covers are not properly latched Continued 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever NOTE In the event of an individual being locked inside As a security measure your vehicle may be built with a the storage bin the storage bin cover can be opened from Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release is built into the inside of the bin by pushing on the glow in the dark storage bin cover latching mechanism lever attached to the storage bin cover latching es mechanism Center And Rear Overhead Console Storage If Equipped The overhead storage system comes in several options Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 81bb8b85 Overhead Console Features 1 DVD 5 Storage 2 Rear HVAC 6 DVD 3 Courtesy Lights 7 Courtesy Lights 1 Storage 8 Halo Lighting If equipped otherwise storage Coat Hooks Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second and third row seating positions The coat hook load limit is 10 Ibs 4 5 kg Exceeding the recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the vehicle 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Cargo Area Storage The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with th
257. he right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the headliner outlets The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear ATC System is on the front lower ATC panel located on the instrument panel Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC System from the front lower ATC panel illuminates a LOCK symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the front lower ATC panel Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The Rear ATC System is located in the headliner near the 1 Press the REAR LOCK button on the front lower ATC center of the vehicle 81bc4f84 Rear ATC Control Features 3 Rear ATC Lock 4 Rear MODE 1 Blower Speed 2 Rear Temperature panel This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear temperature knob 2 Rotate the Rear Blower Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs 3 ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO Once the desired temperature is displayed the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply a
258. hen the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display NE ie ee as Eight point compass headings are displayed N S E W NE NW SE SW IP us sued Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius AVE iir eas Average Fuel Economy U S or Metric DTE us eis ke n BE RS Distance to Empty REEN EE RE sees eee tee Elapsed Time Park Assist On Off Should this wrench symbol display with the letter P next to it your Park Assist System needs servicing Contact an authorized dealer CMTC Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic No
259. hould not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts Installing the Lower Attachments 1 The vehicle lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower child restraint attachment straps reference the child restraint seat in structions to ease the installation NOTE It is recommended to loosen the top tether strap and route it loosely prior to securing the lower anchors so the top tether strap is not trapped between the vehicle seat and child restraint 3 Attach the lower child restraint attachment straps to the vehicle s lower anchor bars Ensure that the lower attachment strap is firmly engaged and that the hook is secure 4 Tighten the lower attachment strap while firmly push ing the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat Remove all slack in the lower attachment straps Reference the child restraint instructions for infor mation on properly removing slack sete ata ahaa ig ee eO En aa Re ee ie Ag ee ure sata Er Bed Br y ata ee Lig ae ee ee ORR EG Oe ee a aa a ee at a a a LEER RUD wnat amauta ani LATCH Anchorages NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Installing the Top Tether Strap with either Lower Ancho
260. hrough the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Bi Level Mode ugh Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfort able while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield DEFROST mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass The SNOWFLAKE mode or A C button allows the operator to manual
261. icle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment information or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your High speed driving with your vehicle at or above authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs maximum load is dangerous The added strain on Compact Spare Tire The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity WARNING e Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle only With these tires do not drive faster than 50 mph 80 km h poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply
262. icles may be blocked Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected alert the driver RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to 2 mph 1 km h to 3 km h to objects moving a maxi mum of approximately 10 mph 16 km h such as in parking lot situations 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Ina parking lot situation oncoming vehicles can be obscured by vehicles parked on either side If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles the system will not be able to alert the driver When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms including radio muting WARNING RCP is not a Back Up Aid system It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using RCP Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before back ing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Modes Of Operation Three selectable modes of operat
263. ifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadv
264. ift lever to the right until D is displayed in the instrument cluster odometer WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or personal injury 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Odometer 5 Screen Displa Actual Gear s Allowed Six Speed Trans irati TT TT NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking simply press and hold the shift lever to the left The transaxle will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down axle Actual Gear s Allowed Four Speed Trans axle Reset Mode Electronic Transaxle The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle automatically shifts into second gear third gear for six speed The transaxle remains in second gear third gear for six speed despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event of a momentary problem the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Shift into PARK 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 4 Restart the engine 5 Shif
265. ifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 heavy loading conditions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup CAUTION If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac ceptable limits the vehicle computer will override DRIVE and select 5 range on six speed transaxles or 3 range on four speed transaxles by changing shift points This is done to prevent transaxle damage due to overheating Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever to the left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position this allows the selection of the desired top gear For example if you shift the transaxle into third gear the transaxle will never shift above third gear but can shift down into second or first gear automatically when needed Switching from ERS to DRIVE can be done at any vehicle speed To shift from DRIVE mode to ERS mode move the shift lever to the left once The current gear will be maintained as the top gear To disable ERS simply press and hold the sh
266. ight distributing hitch 057005169 system may reduce handling stability braking Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with an authorized hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable authorized Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information 392 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id 057005171 057005172 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect ee STARTING AND OPERATING 393 Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See an authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATIONS Max GTW Gross Trailer Class Wt Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Dut 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg
267. ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position ACC ON or START engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System For electrical system malfunctions there is an override for the interlock system In order to override this system remove the cover located to the top right of the shift lever in the instrument panel The override can be activated by pressing the white colored tab which can be accessed through the hole in the instrument panel While the override is pressed the shift lever can be moved out of the PARK position without pressing the brake pedal After operation return the cover to its original position This system prevents the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents moving the shift lever out of PARK unless the key fob is in the ACC ON position and the brake pedal is pressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key fob in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service Four Speed or Six Speed Automatic Transaxle NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 10 F 23 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation
268. iler tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW Continued 398 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 3 GAWR Information in Starting and Operating for the 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch proper inspection procedure This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of trailer tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher Towing Requirements Tires load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or and satisfactory operation of
269. ill use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it
270. in English or Metric units by selecting the Display Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this Section To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front ATC display until the engine warms up The fan will engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected or by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker button and setting the fan to any fixed blower speed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the temperature doors will continue to operate automati cally The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker button The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode gt gt Air is directed t
271. in Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON and the trans mission shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved down as desired Pull the lever upward to the locked or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position to lock the steering column firmly in place j position e Remote Start Mode Inhibit On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position rain sensing wiper operation can resume if it has been selected and no other inhibit conditions mentioned previously exist TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control lever is located on the steering column below the steering wheel 1 Locked Position 2 Unlocked Position Tilt Steering Column Lever To tilt the column push the lever downward to the unlocked position Move the steering column up or UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 WARNING 1 z Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose contro
272. ing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Be eie AA ees ee ELSE oe eee oe 108 O Tilt Mirrors In Reverse Available With B Inside Day Night Mirror If Equipped 108 RR EE se d 2 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 109 o Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 112 EL Oufside Mirrors 44 4 3 os GERBER RE S 109 RE oa EE n 5 Driver s Automatic Dimming Mirror If HI Rear Cross Path cussed EE RS 119 EQUIDPed soe ie ed ER MS tego RE EE 110 HE Modes Of Operation suma s vsu 9 d wury a LE d 120 D Outside Mirror Folding Feature 110 W Uconnect phone If Equipped 121 o Power Mirrors If Equipped 110 W Voice Command If Equipped 121 o Heated Mirrors If Equipped 111 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed NM SE lide EE EE ER iratta 122 D Third Row Power Recline If Equipped 144 O Manual Front And Second Row ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped 148 Seat Adjuster 444444245482 54544704554 122 4 Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE 3 Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped 123 Transmitter To Memory
273. intain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop 332 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Caution safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warning before doing so Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 CAUTION Continued WARNING
274. ion are available in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further information Blind Spot Alert When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object However when the system is operating in RCP the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is requested the radio is muted Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Chime the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object If the turn N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 signal is then activated and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle an audible chime will also be sounded Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time both the visual and audio alerts will be issued In addition to the audible alert the radio if on will also be muted NOTE e Whenever an audible alert is reguested by the BSM system the radio is also muted e If the Hazard Flashers are on the system will reguest the appropriate visual alert only When the system is in RCP the system shall respond with both v
275. ioning A C A light will illu minate when the A C System is en gaged T 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds Max A C For maximum cooling use the A C and RECIRCULA TION mode buttons at the same time 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Three Zone Temperature Control If Equipped With the Three Zone Temperature Control System each front seat occupant can independently control the Heat ing Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle 045605996 Front Upper Three Zone Temperature Control 1 Left Temperature 7 Right Temperature 2 PANEL 8 Rear DEFROST 3 BI LEVEL 9 RECIRCULATION 4 Front Blower 10 Front DEFROST 5 FLOOR 11 Air Conditioning A C 6 MIX NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 The Three Zone Temperature Control bottom panel con trols rear Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations 045605995 Front Lower Three Zone Temperature Control Features 1 Left Heated Seat 2 Rear Blower 3 Rear Temperature 4 Right Heated Seat The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel When the front control is in any position other than rear the front control operates all the rear functions The Three Zone Temperature Control bot
276. ipped with power locks the liftgate can be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter button or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the liftgate press the liftgate release handle located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 81bc38a8 Liftgate Handle Location If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with the power liftgate feature pressing the button on the RKE NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the liftgate area Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using the button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter Press the button on the transmitter twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate When the liftgate is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by BEE pressing the button located on the overhead console Overhead Console Master Power Switch 1 Left Door 3 Right Door 2 Liftgate 4 Master Lock 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the located in the upper left trim in the liftgate openin
277. is occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flash for 30 seconds Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have RKE The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top position e The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the dimmer control is in the extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate and activate the Panic Alarm optional power liftgate left power sliding door and right power sliding door from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the sys
278. is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode 268 UNDERSTANDING YO
279. issue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Instrument Panel Cupholders Removal Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting at one edge to ease removal Cleaning The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe or you may follow the cleaning procedure below Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately 30 minutes After 30 minutes pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION Installation Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the e When installing the Totally Integrated Power corresponding openings in the drawer Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to FUSES do so may allow wate
280. isual and audible alerts when a detected object is present Whenever an audible alert is re guested the radio is also muted Turn hazard signal status is ignored the RCP state always reguests the chime Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems NOTE The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect Phone User Manual located on the DVD for further details 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Manual Front And Second Row Seat Adjuster The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat Pull the bar upward and move the seat to the desired position
281. ition and then remove the Key Fob 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Power window switches will also remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to LOCK depending upon the accessory delay setting Opening the front door will cancel this feature WARNING NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is LOCK or ACC a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prev
282. ized dealer The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information If the headlights are turned off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner NOTE The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Lights On Reminder If the headlights or the parking lights are left on or if the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the ignition switch is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Daytime Running Lights Canada Fleet Vehicles Only The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant lights on condi tion until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn off Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Front Fog Lights If Equipped O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the lo
283. ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If an examination of your engine compartment shows no e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle equipped with air conditioning also keep the front of ed th d lean e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in eE the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory coolant performance poor gas mileage and increased emis
284. jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425 CAUTION Continued e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then move the shift lever back and forth between REVERSE and DRIVE Using minimal accelera tor pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion with out spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Continued It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mp
285. jury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to oper ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING Continued Stow n Go Seating If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating the e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head second and third row seats may be folded into the floor Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable for convenient storage DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event To Fold Second Row Seats of an accident and could result in serious injury or 1 Move the front seat fully forward death Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed 2 Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on the second row seat 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the 4 Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the L
286. jury or death 031407112 Headlight Switch With Halo Control Assembly N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Interior Lighting Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is opened the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is activated or when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top The interior lights will automatically turn off in approxi mately 10 minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every activation thereafter until the engine is started if one of the following occur e A door sliding door or the liftgate is left open e Any overhead reading light is left on NOTE The key must be out of the ignition switch or the ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this feature to operate Dome Light Positions Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent extreme top position to turn on the interior 3 lights The interior lights will remain o on when the dimmer control is in this sibceser Position Interior Lighting Defeat Off D Rotate the dimmer control to the off O position extreme bottom The inte rior lights will remain off when the doors or liftgate are open e 81bc85ec 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control to the first detent This feature brightens the odometer radio and overhead dis plays when the parking lights or head lights are on
287. justed so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 030907652 Adjusted Head Restraint To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint on some models you may need to press the push button To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 030907490 Push Button Active Head Restraint If Equipped For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head Active Head Restraint Normal Position 022607494 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 030907533 Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious in
288. l Towing a 3 as oem 424 040084 403 427 Reminder Seat Belt SS SS 64 65 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 24 ouo Rey ES 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 295 N INDEX 527 Remote DIIEBUIE DUSICBE xod 52 ROER ROTEER Ie 27 Removable Floor Console 45 c2 xem 215 Replacement Keys oos a quede sins uq ed Wed es 15 Replacement Parts uus esc Ro don E op ten Rs 436 Replacement dies au ada ba att dr SE N EER NR 360 Reporting Safety Defects sms san me ms 508 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 239 240 248 Restraint Head eee 128 Restraints Child 2 6 s e600 6 ee08 85 90 Restraints Infant 0 0 00000000 85 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 4 6 and sone Bo am amp 425 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 217 Rotation Tires SS SS SS ss 363 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 100 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 101 Safety Defects Reporting iis 0554544 Ee EES 508 Safety ExHaust GaS ser 565 eee sesh Pape ed 51 99 patety Information Tie os 252419284545 AR EDE 344 Daley Jie GEE ARE eee DE eu eee oe ee RS 99 Satellite Radio Antenna 004 289 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 288 293 Schedule Maintenance lens 486 Seat Belt Maintenance een 465 Seat Belt Reminder 64 65 peat Bells swe bac eas bea eek cee eRe Ee 52 100 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 0 0 58 Adjustable Upper
289. l of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide 032005137 Adjustable Pedal Switch improved position with the steering wheel The adjust Press the button forward to move the pedals forward able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of toward the front of the vehicle driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat positions press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward The switch is located on the left side of the steering toward the driver column e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys EE ENG tem is on The following messages will be displayed Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In You could lose control and have an accident Always formation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjust able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In
290. l the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming Begin Programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the
291. lasie 2233 xd 4k AO See bade 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id N Driving Through Water 332 E Flowing Rising Water iss 64 44 res Iw 332 O Shallow Standing Water 992 W Power Steering sees 334 O Power Steering Fluid Check 24s x res 335 la Parking Brake sa Go E EER ER E 44504565 995 W Anti Lock Brake System ABS 338 O Anti Lock Brake Warning Light 339 N Electronic Brake Control System 340 B Traction Control System TCS 340 G Brake Assist System BAS 341 O Electronic Stability Program ESP 342 OESP BAS Warming Light 24 se Rr s 343 W Tire Safety Information 344 Aire Ed Si Pm 344 O Tire Identification Number TIN 348 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 349 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 350 N Tires General Information 354 EVM P EOSSUID reses Hark Hoe pe 354 H Dre hille Pressures esses ooo eae ds 355 oO Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 356 Hide Ply Tes o oa re SR ke 306 9 8 SOP E 957 OCompact Spare Tire is sh het RES 357 Hd die ODE sie autereteacedeaes eect 358 O Tread Wear Indicators 999 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 ELMO OT MIC 2443562454 RASA IX S EARS E 360 ii Replacement Wises ss ouem ace LEO RP pa bd 360 BEES RR ET wees baiat eiai 361 W Snow Tires 0 0 cee eee 363 Mi Tire Rotation Recommendations
292. lb out 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id Fog Lamp NOTE Access to the fog lamp bulb is from the rear of the fascia On the left rear side of the fascia remove the push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air dam 1 From behind the bumper fascia or the access panel on the air dam twist the bulb counterclockwise and remove bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 2 Disconnect wire harness from the bulb 3 Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Side Marker and Backup Lamp 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the tail lamp assembly by removing the two screws from the inboard side Use a fiber stick or similar tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to disengage the two ball studs MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 EER ao 81bc563e Tail Lamp Housing Fastener Removal Bulb Location NOTE 1 Stop Tail Turn Signal Bulb Combo e If a screwdriver is used make sure a soft material is _2 Backup Bulb placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to scratch the paint bly 3 Twist the socket and remove it from the lamp assem e The PRY location is best closest to the studs while 4 Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket dislodging them se
293. ld Wiper Blades 447 Wiper Blade Replacement use 447 Zone Control Temperature Control 302 CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10Y531 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A
294. ld restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Each vehicle except commercial cargo vehicles is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Two LATCH child restraint anchor age systems are installed on all second row seats and in the center position on all third row fold in floor seats Second row seats also feature tether strap anchorages located in the rear surface of the seatback In addition all third row fold in floor seats are equipped with a child restraint tether anchor at the center seating position NOTE e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and s
295. le Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals For the first three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly and the horn will sound For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash The engine will run only if a valid key is used to start the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Rearming Of The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the Vehicle Security Alarm has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the Vehicle Security Alarm will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition Arming The System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the Vehicle Sec
296. lease Handle 3 Pull upward on the seatback recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat to return the seatback to its full upright position Second Row Seatback Release Lever 4 Adjust the head restraint to the desired position close the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the Unlocked position Easy Access Seating The second row Stow n Go seats can be tilted forward for easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING To tilt the seat pull forward on the release strap located on the front of the seat between the seatback and seat cushion and tilt the seat fully forward To return the seat to its upright position push rearward on the seatback until it latches Always ensure that it is fully latched lt b 030905125 Tilting Second Row Stow n Go Seat In the event of a collision you could be injured if the seat is not fully latched Swivel n Go Premium Seating If Equipped Premium second row Swivel n Go Seating features include e A table that installs between the second and third row seats The table disassembles and stows in the hidden second row floor storage bin e Seats rotate to face forward or rearward e Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats e Dual folding armrests e Aside storage pocket that will accommodate a phone or handheld game 136 UNDERSTANDING
297. led Vehicle ss pie ER PS ende dp 426 Guide a TTL 394 Recreational 22 e lt 649644 Hee ERE R SE RE 403 427 eli ss oh e455 ema se eee ER RE ENTER RS 394 Traction Control s 2444444 RARR ER bee HE RE ded 340 Traction Control Switch iius 340 Traner TOS EE war mg eee eke ashes 389 Cooling Systems TIPE x acis 49 vdd bor sews 402 lain MP 393 Minim m Requirements serres eseses sssi 396 Trailer and Tongue Weight 395 JAIDES 64 dees ee RS ETE OE ON 400 Trailer Towing Gilde ses ass ARE Sake ores 394 Mile Vele Eb wa aot ite geen ota EES AG 394 lhcucci a 324 eel re ui aie tenes as ft AE UE XC SUR OU CRURA 324 Opera iek REDE DEAR ELE RR ees 324 Selection of Lubricant anaa aa 457 483 licucni n sv RA ERA BGG eee Eh ESS 457 PIAOMAUC 223239 22253955495 5 59 5 5 5 5 93 457 lj C 457 483 N INDEX 531 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 187 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Irene portins Het wruyc3op93 394x494 4 Eb ERG S HK J5 Tread Wear Indicators anaana aaaea 359 Ti EO UIE fan eee 3 9 4 dh eee ESI ee DRA 241 TAP eles DTP 299 Tun ion Bee coe OE uev x 160 230 477 478 UCICOMMCCION oa 2545 or DRAG E Sura ORE URN 283 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 121 Umbrella FHoldet xxm mmm 205 Uniform Tire Quality Grades issu 510 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 283 Universal Transmitte
298. lelee ee ee 361 Changing A Flat Iire iss veces os x SA BERE FA 408 Chart Tie SING 42444553 EERS Peet eee Eee os 346 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 234 434 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 99 CHECKS Daly soes ae REKE he Ghee se Ben 99 Child Restraint se oie ee oo a ee inania 85 87 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 91 Child Dalety LOCKS so a ASA ARE DU weeds 46 Clit edt 42464558 oes OER m 90 Clean Air Gasoline iss seat ete BERE HD e dd 374 Cleaning WHS Guaed ecu teed Ve rede aep d ae 462 Cate CONIO aces s ee SA SE EE eee oa 207 s CP 258 260 263 273 Coat HOOK 34 n 209 oi Toket so ores eu ma HE GR sax Ee dp Re oe 210 Cold Weather Operation ES Ee 322 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 296 Compact Spare Tife uas VEER EER ARE RE pei 957 COMPASS 2466424592454 m 241 244 250 Compass Calibration sewer R PRES 244 251 Compass Variance 42444545 056508 bee Hes 243 252 N INDEX 517 Computar dips Travel si eis be ES PRESS 249 Connector C 4 ee pee gag EO IE RO 283 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 283 CODE ESE eee HAS eee eee eed auch i 210 Console BIOO o 44450864444 548 SAO ESTEE 210 Console Overhead ax uus a os OES BERR ES EE 184 Console Removable leen 215 Contract Service uua pee aed quads eges ia 507 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 452 dose rr D EE 449 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 451
299. level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN REP REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e f the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to
300. level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire s
301. link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle This type of hitch is the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer s axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted we
302. ll remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a p
303. llowing the system to function automatically NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 NOTE It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille located in the right side trim panel behind the third row seats The heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor e The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the Display Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this Section Rear Blower Control The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the temperature and clockwise to increase the tempera ture The REAR temperature settings are displa
304. ls Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emission control system tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or systems can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 378 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued e Guard against car
305. lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M During Scan mode you can also press the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON you back to the play mode screen on the radio e Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in
306. lways be sure the seats are fully latched Second Row Seating and Table 030905119 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not in 3 Swivel the second row seats so they are facing the rear Hee TOR ae a ron EE Due 4 Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button into 1 Open the floor storage cover in front of the second row notch of the base seats 81bd165c 030907253 Installing Table Leg Into Base Table and Leg Storage 1 Table Base 2 Lock Release Button 2 Remove the pole and table top by loosening the hook 5 Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops and loop straps N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 NOTE You will hear an audible click when the lock WARNING Continued button engages the base e DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table 6 Place the table top over the installed pole aligning e DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table use with the mating feature of the underside of the table top Apply pressure on the table top and press downward available cupholders e Second row seats must be locked in the rearward NOTE You will hear an audible click when the table facing position before installing the table latch engages the pole WARNING Failure to comply with the following conditions could result in serious injury or even death e DO NOT install the table while v
307. ly activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in SNOWFLAKE mode and the ATC display is on cool dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If ECONOMY mode is desired press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off the SNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the SNOW FLAKE can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or GS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control button RECIRCULATION mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of the RECIRCULATION mode may lead to excessive window fogging The RE CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR MIX and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op eration Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Rear Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of t
308. m Off This message is displayed when the ignition is turned to ON to indicate the Blind Spot System has been turned off Blind Spot System Not Available This message is displayed to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor BSM 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id system is temporarily unavailable due to sensor block age electronic interference or other temporary con ditions When this message is displayed both outside rear view icons will be illuminated If electronic inter ference is present the BSM system will illuminate the icon only on the side of interference as long as interference is present e Service Blind Spot System This message is dis played to indicate the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is permanently unavailable The driver will receive an EVIC message and the BSM display warn ing in both mirrors will be permanently illuminated If this message is present see an authorized dealer e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to dis
309. m cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem 356 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature is 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature is 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the veh
310. ment Cluster Description 227 Load Leveling System cada eret ae Rees 216 Loading VENICE ua aco dag EE RED KIES RS 210 384 387 Capacities 4446s QeGE RS Geaaeetdne HARARE 387 TCS ease eee yl eee vee eee eee EE an 350 Locks Do TER sep cay tea Chee cesar OE IE eos 30 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren CATCH uuu race eee eeg sees eters sew ak 91 WenicanOn Bod 3 do gea doe d HR eee a ED 447 Luggage Rack Roof Rack iis ss ks Rm ER 217 Lie ii SU DDO E ax usu de y eee 4 RE RR OR e 124 Maintenance Pree Battery ave de VEER Dip YA 443 Maintenance Procedures spes uos HER ARE Es 436 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Sunroof 196 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 234 434 Manual Service 00 00 cee eee ee 509 Map Keadine Lights sce dv a Vis ARE RE 185 Memory Feature Memory Seat 148 Memory Seat 224 Re 5ete RA Sages anos age 111 148 Mini Trip Complet c ons 5452454400 241 249 METIO S 9 44 ao ee RE 9 229 9 999 05 999 9 4 108 Automatic DIMMING sereas d Roe nde Ra 109 Electric Remote admo qer X MAER ESE pes 110 Exterior Folding on x uev eee X S barks Red 110 laco RE ARE AE ER EE N eee 111 NIGBIOD C ase iriri eset AE ER Ie RE 148 Outside 25 sek ka me brei a ee KA bee EE 109 conu 26 ein ED ET EE EE ON i 108 EE REEL OR TE OE dore E Oe es 112 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System cesses 364 N INDEX 525 Mopar Fats x 2509 EE e494 eee one Ge e
311. more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check 3 3L Engine with Four Speed Automatic Transaxle If Equipped The dipstick is located just behind the radiator on the lower right side To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 The vehicle must be on level ground 2 The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Fully apply the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the shift lever in PARK Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 5 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or warm Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has been driven at least 15 miles 24 km The fluid cannot be comfortably held between the fingertips Cold is when the fluid is below 80 F 27 C 6 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Remove the dipstick and note reading N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD
312. ms or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof control switch is located in the front overhead console The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation or slides rearward under the roof 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Power Sunroof Operation Opening the Sunroof Manually Press the switch rearward and hold and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically During this opera tion any release of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof WARNING In an accident there is greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle wit
313. n 045607577 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Blower control should be left in the ON position to allow the climate control to either warm or cool the vehicle Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area indicates cooler tempera tures Rotating the knob clockwise 045607540 into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several selections of air distribu Hon You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Mode p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets
314. n Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic Sys tem in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer as soon as possible VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar If seats are removed for carrying cargo do not exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Front Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Rear ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The
315. n the floor under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console 060508990 Spare Tire Location NOTE The base console if equipped must be removed to raise and lower the spare tire Refer to Console Features in Understanding the Features of Your Ve hicle for console removal procedure The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as sembled into a spare tire hook to remove the compact spare tire cover assembly from under the vehicle or a Winch T Handle to raise lower the compact spare tire cover assembly Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the Jacking Instructions vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake help prevent personal injury or damage to your 3 Place the shift lever into PARK vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from 4 Turn OFF the ignition the edge of the roadway as possible before raising 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher the vehicle e Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to 6 Block both the front and rear of the be raised
316. n the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED Two 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets are located on the lower instrument panel next to the open storage bin The upper power outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the lower power outlet is connected directly to the battery The upper power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob and element must be used NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced 325 EE 034605132 12 Volt Power Outlets One outlet in the removable floor console shares a fuse with the lower outlet in the instrument panel and is also connected to the battery Do not exceed a maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps shared between the lower panel outlet and the removable floor console outlet The outlet in the rear guarter panel near the liftgate and the upper outlet in the instrument panel are both con trolled by the ignition swit
317. n using object as a sensor problem causing the SERVICE ParkSense to be able to stop in time when the PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be displayed in obstacle is detected It is recommended that the the instrument cluster driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small ob stacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the ParkSense sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist sys tem Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedes trians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued system it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much clos
318. nce option before writing to the disc 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper
319. ncel this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears ILLUMIN Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the RESET button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Blind Spot Alert There are three selections when operating Blind Spot Alert By pressing and releasing the RESET button once the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Blind Spot Alert Lights mode When this mode is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is activated and will 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors By pressing and releasing the RESET button a second time Blind Spot Alert Lights CHM mode is activated In this mode the Blind Spot Monitor BSM will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn signal is on When Blind Spot Alert Off is selected the Blind Spot Monitor BSM system is deactivated NOTE If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located even if the fascia is not damaged the sensor may have become misaligned Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment Having a sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not
320. nd Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an
321. ndicates vehicle speed 9 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about 1 mile 1 6 km with the turn signals on a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 10 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ESP ity Program ESP is combined with Brake BAS Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of
322. ng the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD SAFE or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals Required Maintenance Intervals as required Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir the PASS tor the required maintenance intervals brake master cylinder the power steering and the transaxle and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Failure to perform the reguired maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 489 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter
323. njury of death to allow the seat belt to go around the child s lap Continued NOTE The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on the hips and as snug as possible 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 5 Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly insert Integrated Child Seat If Equipped the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Operating instructions for the second row bench seat with Integrated Child Seat are included with the seat If the instructions are not with the seat or in the Owner s Manual Package replacement instruction can be ob tained 6 To remove the slack from the lap belt pull upward on the shoulder portion of the seat belt 022605388 Integrated Child Booster Seat i ne release the seat belt push the red button on the Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat uckle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instruc tions Refer to Publication Order Forms in If You Need Consumer Assistance and specify publication number 81 016 8050 when ordering Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride
324. ns The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 12 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed UNDERSTANDIN
325. ns engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Tighten the gas cap
326. ns then move the crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in place retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position 037608566 Crossbar Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has properly locked into position 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE To help control wind noise when installing the CAUTION Continued crossbars ensure the embossed arrow is facing the front of the vehicle When the crossbars are not in use the front To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do crossbar should be fastened just forward of the middle not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of support and the rear crossbar should be fastened at the 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads ds rearmost position of the side rails This will help reduce evenly as possible and secure the load appropri the amount of wind noise when the crossbars are not in ately use Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with The tie down holes on the crossbar ends should always be used to tie down the load Check the straps freguently to be sure that the load remains securely attached CAUTION large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind f
327. nt or child restraint help move the child to the center rear seating position A rearward facing child restraint should only be and use both the lap and shoulder belt Never allow a used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy their back ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or NOTE For additional information refer to fatal injury to the infant www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana Occupants riding in Swivel n Go seating must be wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked in either the forward or rearward position Failure roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm eh so could result in serious injury or even eath dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you w
328. nuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511 in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
329. num base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number Backup Tail Stop Lamp 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED See Note 1 Poe Lamp Ir Eguipped ss uas cm dn PSX24W Park Turn Signals 222 emi PY27 TW or 3757A Front Side Markert sesser sa ted erti simii W5W Headlamp Low and High Beam Halogen H11 Headlamp HID If Equipped Low Beam bres CC 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of High Intensity Discharge HID headlamps when the Note 1 The Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable separately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly see your authorized dealer BULB REPLACEMENT High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service headlamp switch is turned ON It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop erly See your authorized dealer for service NOTE On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis charge HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to
330. ny position The sunroof will close fully then stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof 3 WARNING Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Auto Express with Anti Pinch Protection During express closing anytime an obstacle that restricts glass movement is detected the motor will stop and reverse travel to avoid pinching the object Auto Express will stop and reverse travel up to three times in succession After the third time Auto Express will enter a manual operation mode This allows the operator to manually control the power switch in order to close or open the sunroof in case of a malfunction Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open ope
331. o deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Remote Lock Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The horn will chirp once to acknowledge the signal Remote Open Window Feature This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Sound Horn with Remote Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 2 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pres
332. o the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNINCG There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Auto Up Reset If Equipped To reactivate the Auto Up feature perform the following steps after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buff
333. of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys inde pendently that is a left side impact deploys the left bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and SABIC If Equipped rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in pant protection addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block NOTE the location of the SABIC The area where the side e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners curtain airbag is located should remain free from and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle any obstructions may deploy Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury e Airbag covers may not be obvio
334. ol system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system and may A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel RNING e Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a clicking e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near sound This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the properly tightened tank filled e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL may Continued come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled 384 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further informatio
335. ol Button as it appears on the left side of the steer ing wheel spoke Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Compass Temperature Trip System Status and Personal Settings Press the STEP button to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions Avg Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units Steering Wheel EVIC Compass Temp Control Button as it appears on the right side of the steering wheel spoke 81c27d71 Press and release the Compass Temperature button to for instant access to the Compass Temperature screens Press this button to RESET Trip Functions and change Personal Settings NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar chime will sound when vehicle starts moving Hood Ajar if equipped with hood switch Check TPM System refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting And Operating Turn Signal On RKE Battery Low LOW WASHER FLUID Oil Change Required Check Gascap Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Park Assist Disabled Service Park Assist System Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Blind Spot Syste
336. on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important to regularly check and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver Module e Four TPMS Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and graph ics displaying tire pressures e Yellow TPMS Telltale Warning Light 370 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id TPMS Low Pressure Warnings The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be acti vated when one or more of the four active road ti
337. on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll Engine Compartment 3 3 3 8L 431 N Engine Compartment 4 0L 432 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 433 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 433 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance OES teed ideas ud e V Rus ES HE E 434 B Replacement Parts es SS ee 436 W Dealer Service AAR ccs eh EE ET OE 436 Bl Maintenance Procedures 436 EUBUgIBe Ol ay sas oe aie pede HER e does 437 HEngite Ol Pier a a o4 24354 4 dad ex hat 440 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter sss vam oe is oy eax 440 O Exhaust SYSE a2 65 AR EE DERE DRR DS 441 OMaintenance Free Battery 4 524 052 DEE H O Air Conditioner Maintenance O Body dek ile HOME P 447 o Windshield Wiper Blades 447 OCo oling System so sg Supe yes SR EER HY 449 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id A BAKES 5446444608645 SE RARO O0 Automatic Transaxle lt s s44 heee404 8 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSION S s 9 ER ees ERA MR eee ee oud oO Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders N Fuses H Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM Bl Vehicle Storage W Replacement Bulbs ll Bulb Replacement o High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID If Equipped O Quad Headlamps 460 465 466 466 474 475 476 476 D Front Park Turn Signal Lamp sie cs 477 O Front Side Marker Lamp
338. on indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO on depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single
339. onsole Power Sliding Door Master Switch 1 Left Door 2 Liftgate 3 Right Door 4 Master Lock 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the sliding doors are eguipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the sliding side door 2 Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward toward the vehicle to engage the Child Protection Door Lock Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock al ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING e When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en gaged even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle the RKE transmitter the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door The power sliding side door will operate from the Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remembe
340. ontents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt
341. orces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to a load This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle e Crossbars should remain equally spaced or paral lel at any luggage rack position for proper func tion Noncompliance could result in damage to the luggage rack cargo and or vehicle Continued WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in pet sonal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack SUN SCREENS IF EQUIPPED Sun screens are available for second and third row seating windows The screens store in the sill trim panels and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out Sun Screen Retracted 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the window Sun Screen Extended To lower the sun screen gently lift the tab upward to GEE Re 48327 disengage the hooks and feed the screen back into the Sun Screen Attaching To Retainer Clips base sill Once the screen is completely to the top of the window extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks attached to the top of the
342. oseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 491 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Chan
343. outward on the exterior handle Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched anytime the vehicle is in motion NOTE The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open This feature operates only when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel door Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped The power sliding door may be opened or closed manu ally or by using the buttons on the RKE transmitter overhead console switch or rear door switch Pulling the inside or outside power sliding door handle will also power open or close the power sliding door NOTE Pulling the outside power sliding door handle a second time while the sliding door is power opening or power closing will allow the sliding door to be opened or closed manually Press the button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds to open a power sliding door When the door is fully open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 There are power sliding side door switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers and in the overhead console for the driver and passengers Pressing the switch once will open the power sliding door When the door is fully open pressing the switch a second time will close the door NOTE The power sliding side door must be unlocked before the power sliding
344. oved a hair moisture or dew on the disc N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System If Equipped The controls for the manual system in this vehicle contain a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 045607574 Manual Temperature Control 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Front Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off positio
345. ow or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off a Second row heated seat switches are located in the sliding side door handle trim panels and function the same as front switches Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Adjusting Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The head restraint should be ad
346. ows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 17 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Ihings To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 19 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not WARNING come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap S ie operating conditions This can cause a fire if you
347. parately 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 5 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the 1 Using a small screwdriver press inward the locking lamp assembly tab on the outboard side of the lamp assembly and pull Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL down on the lamp assembly for removal The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable 2 Twist and remove the socket from the lamp assembly separately The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly and pull the bulb out to remove thorized dealer EA ONE MIE 3 Push the bulb into the socket twist the socket into the License Lamp lamp assembly and reinstall the lamp assembly into place The license plate lamp is located under the tailgate light ensuring the locking tab is secure bar and above the license plate N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel Approximate 20 Gallons 76 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 3L and 3 8L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 7 Liters 4 0L Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified 5 2 Liters Cooling System ME 3 3L 3 8L and 4 0L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant 13 4 Quarts 12 6 Liters Antifreeze 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level Add 2 9 Ots 2 8 L if equipped with a rear heater 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part TR MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant Five Year 100 000 Mile Fo
348. play each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Menu button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC Press the STEP button to scroll through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the cur
349. ple should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 2 The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the WARNING front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of around your lap the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your h
350. poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION 20 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for seven 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition AX switch is first turned ON If the light is not on affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is during starting stays on or turns on while flashing severe catalytic converter damage and driving have the system inspected by an authorized power loss will soon occur Immediate service is dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints required in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 21 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a
351. pped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Perform this operation while standing outside the vehicle 2 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm The following table explains the Lamp Flash options Signal Lamps Flashes Unlock 1st Press LeftSide 2 Unlock All Doors JAN 2 Left Side Left Side 2 Right Side RightSile 2 Liftgate AlUl 2 2
352. properly buckled up in a rear seat According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder injury or death to infants in this position belt or the LATCH child rest
353. r slsn 197 Unleaded Gasoline 0 0000 ee eee 373 Bles se SERE ET EE IE 463 VEE MITON Sid ds WERE RAD SEED FIDE E oe os 112 Variance Compass 444 465 sei oe Hub pee iii 243 252 Vehicle Certification Label 292a sum E 384 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 2929s ure dE ES EE 351 384 387 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 NODE OGE unoec 9 P9 91 94 XR e DRESS 315 474 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video Systemi iese ee deg vasa d vg 293 Voice Recognition System VR 121 Warning Flasher Hazard 2 amp 2 emi 406 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 227 Warnings and Cautions 42540606 BED ER gnia 6 Warranty Information esse ss SE Ee 508 Washer adding PIUIG ss sea 243999 33 99 xx ex 448 Washing Venice 24 ia AE EDE IR DE PR DAS ES 461 532 INDEX NEE Id Water Duns INONDO saos doiqet 9 bur fb tg ded 332 Wheel and Wheel Trim Lees 462 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 462 Wheel NUE Tofu seb a da 9969 KERE akiri 418 Wind Bellieting augus 66064445 445055 ei 41 196 Window POBRE 3t gruce 1650 9 Baca KERE en eas 215 Windows excea RARE 645445555 36 POWCE iss ske ER ware SE SUE E NE S WP a e 36 Rear Vent 4252449 debe 6 oe hob ee Sas 36 Windows Express Down 006 22 Windshield Defroster 4 5256 ow ace et ioe HEERS 101 Windshield Washers a sa ooie 24 essri MAR HE WS 448 Windshie
354. r For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary Once you have completed securing the child restraint with the seat belt secure the top tether strap Refer to Installing the Top Tether Strap for instructions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 WARNING Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly NEVER carry a child in a rear facing infant carrier in injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a vehicle without rear seats In an accident serious a collision injury or death may occur from the deploying pas senger airbag Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE COMMERCIAL VEHICLES ONLY IF EQUIPPED Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a family vehicle and are not intende
355. r governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The guality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxid
356. r seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move to a position 0 3 in 7 7 mm forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0 9 2 7 in 22 7 67 7 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0 9 in 22 7 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If your vehicle is not equipped with an EVIC your dealership can activate deactivate this feature
357. r that the sliding doors can only be opened from the outside door handle or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding door from the rear seats press the ON Master Lock Out Switch lo cated in the front overhead console next to the driver To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the sliding side door 2 Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward away from the vehicle to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door if equipped 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN NOTE After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position The power sliding side door switches will not open the power sliding doors if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h The power sliding door will operate from the outside door handle the RKE transmitter the switches on the overhead console or the switches located on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door when the shift lever is in PARK regardless of the child lock lever position LIFTGATE On vehicles equ
358. r to get into the Integrated Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM Power Module and possibly result in a electrical The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located system failure in the engine compartment near the battery Refer to the When replacing a blown fuse it is important to applicable Engine Compartment illustration in this use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating section This center contains cartridge fuses and mini The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated fuses A label that identifies each component may be may result in a dangerous electrical system over printed or embossed on the inside of the cover load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the FUSES TIPM following table Cartridge Mini as Fuse Fuse Description Fuse Fuse Pink rig ABS Green 40 Amp J2 30 Amp Power Liftgate Pink Module 40 Amp Green o Memory If Equipped PZEV Motor Flex Fuel J3 30 Amp Rear Door Module Pink RR Door Node JA 25 Amp Driver Door Node Natural Jo 25 Amp Passenger Door Natural Node 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Green System ABS Pump ESP Power Sliding Door Module Thatchum Relay Lock Feed Ignition Off Draw IOD Main J11 30 Amp Pink 19 60 Amp Yel low i D J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Pink Relay Manifold Tuning Valve
359. raint anchorage system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren e Rearward facing child seats and infant carriers must LATCH NEVER be used while the second row Swivel n Go seats are in the rearward facing position e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Never place any child seat booster seat or infant carrier in the Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing position The swivel seat should be locked in the forward position when using any child seat booster seat or infant carriers with the vehicle in motion Failure to do so could result in serious injury or even death Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the
360. rake is applied and the automatic transaxle is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake WARNINC Continued should always be applied whenever the driver is not in e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav the vehicle ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage WARNING or injury Also be certain to leave the transaxle in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving roll and cause damage or injury unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be eri aj wed Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with child could operate power windows other con the parking brake released a brake s
361. rank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of gen
362. re pressures are low In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pressure message for three seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing 81826bed Low Tire Pressure Display Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value The system will automatically update the graphic display of the pressure value s will stop flashing and ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Message The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds This text message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which TPMS Sensor s is not being received 81826bd7 Check TPM System Display If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will no longer flash the CHECK
363. rent fuel tank level NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the STEP button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset the Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the RESET button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped ww COMPASS Button The compass readings indicate the direc tion the vehicle is facing Press and relea
364. reo O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 282 Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack 262 5 Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 282 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 263 ME ed Ene Gb D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD It Hosipped s ex vea ace RE REESE IA 283 EA Ar 266 n Connecting The iPod eee ee 284 NES OE MED ES age oe EL an Using TMe Feature ien eie Ra tristeki 284 O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 270 D Controlling The iPod Using Radio on P aoe ey eee Ir 285 NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 o Play Mode O List Or Browse Mode ll Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN RER RBZ RES Radios a 4 Gb pane oe SERE TE T D System Activation o Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode O Satellite Antenna H Reception Quality O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone IP Edaipped is saw don HERE S Dni dot eas 207 ll Uconnect Multimedia Sirius Backseat TV ll Baulppell xo usc e pode os 295 ll Video Entertainment System VES IFECHIDDSd aas kane tanse cade 4 Pied Gok ES 293 ll Remote Sound System Controls IF EOUIDDSU ss ss LE RED SEED eee es 295 TAO perd on cese ecd e EP i coed ES E S 295 HELD Pie P 296 B CD DVD Disc Maintenance 296 W Ra
365. reset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pus
366. rmula HOAT 5 Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or eguivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 3 3L and 3 8L Engines Chrysler Material Standard M 6395 Refer to your oil filler cap for cor rect SAE grade Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 4 0L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your oil filler cap for cor rect SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 3L and 3 8L Engines RE14PLP5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 4 0L Engine ZFRSLP 13G Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 3 3L and 3 8L En 87 Octane eines Fuel Selection 4 0L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Recommended NE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 Automatic Transaxle Brake Master Cylinder brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans Power Steering Reservoir mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS N Emissions Control System Maintenance 486 O Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule
367. rn axle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up 3 Right Stop T 7 Running L i 4 ie Dn IH MES This action will also provide better engine braking 402 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE e Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before tow ing e The six speed automatic transaxle is sealed and re quires an authorized dealer to check the transaxle fluid Electronic Speed Control If Equipped e Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed e Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating take the following actions e City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans axle into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed e Highway Driving Reduce speed e Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC CAUTION Towing this vehicle behind another vehicle flat towing with all four wheels on the ground is not recommend
368. rol knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1
369. rs or Vehicle Seat Belt 1 Route the top tether strap under the adjustable head restraint between the steel posts 2 Provide enough slack reference child restraint in structions for the tether strap to reach the tether anchor located near the bottom of the seat back 3 Clip tether hook to tether anchor Ensure that the hook is firmly engaged and secure 4 Remove all slack and tighten tether strap according to 81ce919a child restraint manufacturer s instructions Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting NOTE The top tether strap is always to be secured regardless of if the child restraint is installed with the lower anchors or the vehicle seat belt 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Installing the Child Restraint Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retracto
370. rth To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE e A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi ronment free from large metallic objects such as build ings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc e Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false com pass readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approximately ten seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed To change the zone press and release the CMTC reset button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually cali
371. s ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or you turn the ignition switch to the ON position NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency RF noises of the system Power Open Close Power Liftgate If Equipped Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter within five seconds to Open Close the Power Liftgate If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power closed the liftgate will reverse to the full open position 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME If
372. s played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 487 NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut OFF Checki
373. s Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and freguency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer is shared It is located in the engine compartment and should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out any residual water The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield MOPAR All Weather Windshield Washer
374. s or if the Vehicle Security Alarm system is alarming or if the PANIC button was pressed the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid Key Fob into the ignition switch and rotating the Key Fob to the ON position and then rotating the Key Fob back to the LOCK OFF position DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Lock the front doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on each door trim panel If the lock plunger is down when you shut either front door the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 81b785cf 021807167 Manual Door Lock Sliding Door Lock If the lock plunger is rearward when you shut either side WARNING sliding door the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition switch and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use thi
375. s a reminder that the lt Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC IF EQUIPPED NOTE e The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating elimi nating the need to manually calibrate the compass e If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field The Compass Mini Irip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver interactive dis play displays information on outside temperature com pass direction and trip information NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CMTC Reset Buttons CMTC Reset Button Press the left reset button located on the instrument cluster to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the ON position then press and hold the reset button for approximately two seconds W
376. s switch to lock or unlock the doors 81b785ce Driver Power Door Lock Switches 1 Unlock 2 Lock If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 operate A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to door is open the sliding door will lock remove the Key Fob Lock Doors Automatically If Equipped If the Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the following procedure e On vehicles equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information 81bb70c3 Front Passenger Power Door Switches 1 Window Open Close 3 Doors Unlock 2 Doors Lock 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e On vehicles not eguipped with the optional
377. s used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will
378. s will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Basic TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e TPMS Telltale Warning Light STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Tire Pressure Warnings The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will illu minate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value located on the placard on the driver s side B Pillar The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received NOTE The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information The TPMS Warning Lamp will flash on and off for 75 seconds and rem
379. se the compass button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside tem perature NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Eguipped The ECO message will display below the outside tem perature in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mo
380. sed on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 346 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification Dlank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire ze associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified press
381. sion Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning er Light in the instrument panel for approxi N mately four to six seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning
382. sions Brakes In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing underhood services or immediately if the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHI
383. sire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory position using the other numbered Memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to Memory Position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the driver s door during a recall 5 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur befor
384. so contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System VR If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the
385. station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id The button located in the center of the left hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating rem
386. ster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED Further more once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED mes sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a ParkSense system malfunction occurs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM If this occurs making sure the rear fascia bumper is free from snow ice mud dirt and debris see your autho rized dealer Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the ParkSense system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Objects must not be within 12 in 30 cm from the rear CAUTION Continued fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close The vehicle must be driven slowly whe
387. t into the desired gear range and resume driving NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recom mended that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 If the transaxle cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a layer of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Ma
388. t of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will WARNING decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will reguire more freguent coolant changes e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any pressure cap while the system is hot or under accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requirin
389. tability Program Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 168 Electronic Stability Program ESP 342 Electronic Vehicle Information Center de die nee eet ET ET AE EET ES 182 245 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher see ex RAAS EE ae 406 cd lt i ae a ee AAS ERE 408 410 VOIP DELE Sos iso o arc oa OR AREAS DERE 421 GOVErNe ND sers ee EES EO GET RAD ERK 406 Emission Control System Maintenance 434 486 Iro EERS node 29 Seed oa 6 ee cone 431 432 Aif Cleanet u 2323209 3X2 oes E ORS RA 440 Block Heater cua he demde aov em Ros 323 Break In Recommendations 98 Checky CILESVel id aora OR RD og 437 Compartment 4 a3 49 ES Or EY LER A 431 432 Coolant Antifreeze 2 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee 482 don PL ee es ase ease aes 449 Exhaust Gas Caution 51 99 378 N INDEX 519 Llooded EENS 4 4655 eu 5545 45445534403 322 Fuel Nequmiremems 45 9624 4694454449 ii 373 481 OWL ass Gas Bote eee sss Geass 437 481 482 Oil Change Interval uus REEL RE OR eens 438 Oil Dissosal cgs acr Hi dedos d pu ed e cepas 440 OIL Tiller Cam s 2 2ccee wa qoe wap SOP ok qup E 45 439 Oil Filter Disposal usse OER pP Es 440 Oil Selection 4244444656450 468606445 438 481 dik aa die oe OAAR OE EE eee ae ae 439 8 Ui EE AE t doi e 406 DIENS oa oe Co ep OO DE Gow DE Hi 321 Temperature Gauge dsrscssi Box KAR PERE ss 236 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 77 Exhaust Gas Caution 51 99 378 441 E
390. talyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs the vehicle should be stopped the engine shut OFF and the vehicle allowed to cool Thereafter service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be ob tained immediately N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage WARNING e Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Battery fluid is a corrosive
391. tboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi tive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a
392. te custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status e Pedal position e And other configuration parameters depending on vehicle 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Integra
393. ted Child Booster Seat If Equipped The Integrated Child Booster Seat if equipped is located in each second row passenger seat The booster seat is designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 Ibs 22 and 39 kg and between 47 in 119 cm and 57 in 145 cm tall The booster seat is designed to raise the child high enough to use the vehicle lap and shoulder belt The booster seat latch release handle is located at the front of the seat cushion Booster Seat Release Handle To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat follow these steps 1 Pull the release handle forward to release the latch and seat cushion Then lift seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the booster seat position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 e The swivel seat should be locked in the forward facing position when using the booster seat with the vehicle in motion Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury 2 Place the child upright in the seat with their back Booster Seat Position firmly against the seatback WARNING 3 Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt Failure to comply with the following conditions 4 Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary could result in serious i
394. teering column If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may do the following e Remove the 20 Amp mini fuse in the Totally Inte grated Power Module TIPM labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Center amp Rear Dome Lamp 578 Center amp Rear Reading Lamps 578 Front Door Courtesy Lamp 2 aor doe gd 0 9 Front Header Reading Lamps If Equipped 578 Instrument Cluster Lamps PC74 Litgate Lamps si reede kadarda cow ber ses 578 Overhead Console Reading Lamps PCs Removable Console Lamp If Equipped 194 Visor Vanity Lamps ss oe ee RE is endow us 6501966 NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Alumi
395. tem NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters Two RKE transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle Vehicles built without the powered options will be equipped from the factory with three button RKE trans mitters and those built with power options will be equipped with up to seven button RKE transmitters 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Using the RKE Transmitter Three button RKE transmitters will provide basic UN LOCK LOCK and PANIC functions 020207434 Key Fob With Three Button RKE Transmitter Seven button RKE transmitters will provide functions that allow the same basic operation as the three button but may also be used to operate the power liftgate optional power sliding doors Remote Start feature optional Some features can be programmed to the customers preferences For example flash headlights or sound horn on LOCK 020207433 Key Fob With Seven Button RKE Transmitter N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Remote Unlock Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s side or twice to unlock all doors and liftgate The Illuminated Entry system also turns on
396. than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 055007576 Tread Wear Indicators 1 Worn Tire Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires es AA NE to help you in determining when your tires should be These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread replaced grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING The tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is need
397. tible to stone breakage than glass head lights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or equivalent or any com mercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abra sive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft t
398. til you hear a click The retractor should withdraw any slack in the belt To release the small latch plate position the end of the large latch plate against the red button on the small latch plate and push upward Reinstall the latch plates into the headliner Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seats and the second row outboard seats the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by pushing anywhere on the anchorage To move the an chorage downward squeeze the actuation buttons while simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem bly 022607432 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear ou
399. tinued e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 25 km N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427 CAUTION Continued e Always use wheel lift equipment when towing from the front The only other approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal liftgate and fascia will occur Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not in the LOCK or ACC positions If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL Towing Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the OFF position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission is only permitted within the limitations described in this section Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a front wheel drive vehicle
400. tires in sets of four Never Continued combine them with other types of tires 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Continued e Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica tors the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information STARTING AND OPERATING 359 WARNING e Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gen erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more
401. to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help prote
402. tom panel has five positions off rear and a range of blower speeds Only when the primary control for the rear blower is in the rear RR position do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera tion Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when the front control is in the PANEL mode When the front unit is in BI LEVEL mode airflow will be emitted from both the upper and lower rear outlets When the front control is in FLOOR DEFROST or MIX modes airflow will be directed out of the rear floor outlets 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Rear Manual Climate Control If Equipped The Rear Manual Climate Control system has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear seat passengers are located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 81bc4f92 Rear Manual Climate Controls 3 Rear Climate Control Lock 4 Rear MODE Rear Blower 2 Rear Temperature Rear Blower Control The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate
403. tomatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts Outside Mirror Folding Feature All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Power Mirrors If Equipped Use the mirror select switch located on the driver s door trim panel to adjust the view obtained in the outside mirrors Press the switch to the L left or R right for mirror selection Press the mirror select switch again to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position The mirror selection will also automatically turn off after 30 seconds 030405640 Power Side Mirror Adjust 1 Left Mirror 3 Adjusting Switch 2 Right Mirror Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move Driver s side power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirrors in Reverse Available with Memory Seat Only
404. trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 22 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button If Equipped Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings or the ECO display The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 NOTE On the Base cluster the reset button toggles between odometer Trip A Trip B ECO and outside temperature To reset a message display on Bas
405. ts contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 509 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at
406. u eae eee 9 o er es 159 234 478 Fold in Floor Stow n Go Seating 131 Freeing A Stick Veljicl 1i ace RR maa AS 425 o MO ES beeen yee ese es ee ON 373 AUUE errare es bA PEE RE E E ee GE PES 382 Additives 6 64 6 iS ES RE ROES LERAARS 5405 376 Clean Ail 2a s were EE TOR EF AR eee 374 Filer Cap Gas Cap 3244 6 se PR SR AE 241 382 Filler Door Gas Cap 244 BESEER age HR s 241 ET 24 aes ee ee ee es SE RE ws 373 su TE SEE EE ented 227 Ira C 6 pee m 227 Octane Rae siens sunirqeedraoe 3 24 396 482 ISenuemenbs ou u amp BR AD HE DA SR 373 481 Tank CHDOOlD esee pe sone shee domed AE 481 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fue System Laufin sambok RE sae seen cae olf Ign M eina tetas noeeds ER eae yes 382 lo jacks oath 424 4554 eek eevee hess 466 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 187 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 382 384 433 Gasoline Clean Air 2 2 2 2 2 des 374 Gasoline Fuel onset nee ee ea ben eee ee 8s 373 Gasoline Reformulated 375 N INDEX 521 Gauges Coolant Temperature sesse VIA RE RR HR d 236 BET ETES EE OE OE OT 227 DDEGHOmefefi eter don dd a a e dn E ale 230 TaCchomeleE senses deis Mur ea dete he ee 234 E i APP 326 General Information 16 26 373 Glass CICNE os peciat iniaa nAn BORD 6d 464 Grocery Bae Reine our soes deer VS GED es 143 Gross Axle Weight Rating 385 389 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 385 389
407. uine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the gualified service person nel special tools and eguipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in
408. ure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 348 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for high zits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only reguired to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Tire Terminology and Definitions
409. urity Alarm is armed NOTE If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu ously during vehicle operation have the system checked by your authorized dealer Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during liftgate entry Pressing the liftgate button will not 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected the exterior lights will flash the horn will sound If th
410. us in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment N b THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat mov
411. utton twice and SET 2 will show in the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON
412. vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels be kept clear and open e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
413. vehicle is in a forward gear The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow ice and dirt road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly Do not block the area of the rear fascia where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects bumper stickers bicycle racks etc 030405521 Sensor Locations N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the The BSM system can also be configured to sound an detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light audible chime alert and mute the radio to notify the located in the outside mirrors driver of objects that have entered the detection zones Refer to Modes Of Operation for further information The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points Side Rear Front while driving to see if an alert is necessary The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries 030405240 i BSM Warning Light 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Entering From The Side Entering From The Rear Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side of the vehicle side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph 48 km h Side Monitoring Rear Monitoring UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
414. ven cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed et 022605152 Removing Slack from Belt 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a click Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck When the belt is long enough to fit insert the large latch plate into the buckle un
415. w beam headlights and push in the headlight switch control knob Pressing the head light switch control knob in a second time will turn the front fog lights off Battery Protection This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing down the battery if the headlights parking lights or front fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position After eight minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK position and the headlight switch in any position other than OFF or AUTO the lights will turn off automatically until the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SE The battery protection feature will be disabled if the ignition switch is turned to any other position other than LOCK during the three minute delay Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column The multifunction lever controls the e Turn Signals e Headlight Beams Low High e Flash To Pass Optical Horn e Front and Rear Wipers Washer Functions Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights Turn Signals NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indi
416. way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and r
417. which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate Maintaining Your Airbag System the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothin
418. xus roe MEER de RE GOES RES 41 Slippery Surfaces Driving ON s ress cessat essa 331 SmartBeams SS SS SS eee eee eee 161 Snow Chains Tire Chains 361 Snow Tires us suce daos aon SERE RAAP See aE da 363 ooie lite sies keedE ED oa D We een 357 409 Speed Control Cruise Control 168 DOccdOMICIe aessa me get EE GRADE N Ee Re Dr 230 Dion x ea g nes dehy gees EIE EK 321 Automatic Transmission 0 321 Cold Weather ink EER de 4686 RE 4 322 Eiieuie Pauls to Sar suu sue es RS BOERE pei 322 Remote 4 65844 bd 98 9 3 54 SEREBRAAL EE RU 27 Starting and Operating sers eed ud y pet HER ues 22 N INDEX 529 tarune Procedures os EDE on tst rigi 321 Steering lou JA 334 335 Tt COMMON oo osse kan REED eb DE wax 166 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Systemi GCONUOIS soe s ecce doe DER BE eee DR RD ER N 295 06 2 ru EE DREAM 203 474 MOGE Bi ries koes dane ee oe chee RARE 203 ope Velde sae dear gus P ORE oes 315 474 otonine Your Veici sies oa ee RR IE ORR A7A Stow n Go Fold in Floor Seats 131 zit mi srka ee Oke ha ee SES Se 193 SUNG asses SOIP us gaa RARR Yo Re LR oo 185 Sunroof Maintenance 00004 196 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 66 PUDE Eng ime Ol 4 2 see dris d aio ees EN 439 Svetem Renole Sarie s ex ad sen ES REIS 27 UE noni P SERIES hee eGo te 4 234 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 306 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant
419. y during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the airbag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Continued e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any Way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If Equipped Supplemental side seat airbags provide enhanced protec tion and work together with supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant during a side impact The supplemental side seat airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Label When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side
420. y warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual d i SITZ ti lo Iu E e TR WATER HM FUEL REAR WIND ENTERA Bum Hi BEAS TURN SIGNALS HEATED SEAT C E WIPER FAZ ME Lia FR h s s KD du E 7 I FUEL ALAA WARD MS TED LEAT TG LI BEAAM REY ACTIVATE LAP ER AHD ER eg C mod remi LIFT THE PRESSURE INTERMITTENT MIFER WARME 3 POWER OUTLET MNA OUTLET MONTTON am de pusm e CX i Pa VOS TER d ORR V PLU PAL EIE REAR dIe MA HELD WAS DOME LHBIT PROT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEANE LOWES AIH RECINCULATION CONVYEHTISLE THACTION FLL LEVEL MLET A WE DE DONI CON THE o Q Ws KA w m 200 CX M WINDEHELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTHONIC ERGE DV HEAT WONDE Dt PARK LIGHTS ATAR HET LAP AbD LIF TATE GEESTES AD VENTILATING FAN RHODA LUSH THROTTLE DPEN LOWES h OUTLET CONTEOL Ea QD W G a w
421. yed in the front upper ATC panel 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id When rear controls are locked by the front system the LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored Rear Mode Control Auto Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu pants Headliner Mode gt Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Pap J Air comes from the floor outlets Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling
422. yless Entry RKE transmitters can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed Driver Memory Switch Your vehicle may have been delivered with two RKE transmitters Only one RKE transmitter can be linked to each of the memory positions NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the SET S button and a numbered button 1 or 2 is pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s side view mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the key 7 Press and release the SET S button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within 10 seconds if you de
423. your vehicle Refer to EE system of JOUL vehicle with that of the trailer Tires General Information in Starting and Oper This could cause inadequate braking and possible ating for proper tire inflation procedures personal injury e Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 399 e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is WARNING required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of sd 2 000 Ibs 907 kg e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 400 STARTING A
424. ystem malfunc trols or move the vehicle tion is indicated Have the brake system serviced by Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged an authorized dealer immediately before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Continued 338 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e A clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations e A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisti cated electronic equipment that may be suscep tible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals

2010 Chrysler Town & Country Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

2010 Chrysler Town &amp; Country Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

2010 Chrysler Town & Country Owner`s Manual